Industrial Flow Measurement

Industrial flow measurement
D184B075U02 Rev. 08 09.2011

The features and characteristics of the most important methods of
measuring the flowrate and quantities of flowing fluids are described
and compared.
Numerous practical details provide the user with valuable information

about flow metering in industrial applications.

Basics and practice
This document including all its parts is copyright protected.
Translation, reproduction and distribution in any form including edited or excerpts in particular
reproductions, photo-mechanical, electronic or storage in information retrieval and data processing
or network systems without the express consent of the copyright holder is expressly prohibited and
violations will be prosecuted.
The editor and the team of authors kindly request your understanding that, due to the large amount
of data described, they cannot assume any liability for the correctness of all these data.
In case of doubt, the cited source documents, standards and regulations are valid.
2011 ABB Automation Products GmbH

Industrial Flow Measurement
Basics and Practice
Authors:
F. Frenzel, H. Grothey, C. Habersetzer, M. Hiatt,
W. Hogrefe, M. Kirchner, G. Ltkepohl, W. Marchewka,
U. Mecke, M. Ohm, F. Otto, K.-H. Rackebrandt,
D. Sievert, A. Thne, H.-J. Wegener, F. Buhl, C. Koch,
L. Deppe, E. Horlebein, A. Schssler, U. Pohl,
B. Jung, H. Lawrence, F. Lohrengel, G. Rasche, S. Pagano,
A. Kaiser, T. Mutongo
ABB Automation Products GmbH

Introduction
In the recent decades, the market for the products of the industrial process industries
has changed greatly. The manufacture of mass products has shifted to locations where
raw materials are available economically. Competitive pressures have forced a swing
to specialization as well as to an ability to adapt to customers desires. The systems are
designed so that the economic data, such as raw material properties, raw material
costs, batch sizes, are quickly integrated into the processes. An important consider-
ation is the assurance and improvement of product quality.
The operation of such systems requires a high degree of automation. With the assis-
tance of process technology the control of the procedures can be optimized and per-
sonnel requirements minimized. The process control technology assures that process
cycles are documented so that the quality of the product is always traceable.
The most important prerequisite for automation is knowledge of the actual process pa-
rameters, which can be ascertained utilizing measurement instruments. If the actions
dependent on the measurements are to be realized then the specifications must natu-
rally be qualitatively high. Therefore, the measurement instrument requires:
high accuracy
easily understandable functionality
easy operation and maintenance
testability even without a test bench
self monitoring
error signalling / self-diagnostics
communication ability
The planner of an industrial process system assumes in advance that the measure-
ment error limits will be satisfied. However, it is not always possible to divorce oneself
from the problems associated with the measuring point.
This publication for industrial flow measurement aims at supporting practitioners in

solving their versatile and demanding tasks. At the same time, it is intended to provide
a vivid overview of the basic measuring principles and their limitations to interested
newcomers.
Advanced developments and a well-structured, global network of ABB research cen-

ters are the basis for innovative products and solutions. ABB products are manufac-
tured at powerful production sites by experienced and committed staff using the latest
methods and technologies. Competent and friendly sales support and after-sales ser-
vice round off ABB's range of products and services.
5
We hope you will enjoy reading this publications and take advantage of its practical
use. We would like to thank all authors who have contributed to creating this publica-
tion. Any suggestions and comments from your side are welcome and will flow into the
development process of new technological solutions.
ABB Power and productivity for a better world
6
List of Symbols
A Area, cross-section (mm2, m2 )

B Magnetic flux density, induction (T)
b Width (mm, m)
C Flow coefficient (1)
c Resistance coefficient (1) (see Electromagnetic Flowmeters)
c Sound velocity (m/s)
c Specific heat (J/K kg)
D, d Diameter (mm, m)
E Velocity of approach factor (1) (see Differential Pressure Measurement)
E Energy (J, KWh)
e Energy level (kinetic energy expressed as liquid level) (m)
F Force (N, kg m/s2)
f Frequency (s-1)
g Acceleration due to gravity = 9.81 m/s2
H Energy level (kinetic energy expressed as liquid level) (m)
h Height, elevation, level (mm, m)
J Electrical current (A)
k Surface roughness (mm)
l Length (mm, m)
m Mass (g, kg)
m Area ratio d2/D2 (1) (see Differential Pressure Measurement)
p Pressure (Pa, bar), Pdyn = dynamic pressure
p Differential pressure (Pa, bar)
qm Mass flow, mass flow rate (g/s, kg/h)
qQ Heat flow, heat flow rate (J/s)
qv Volume flow, volume flow rate (l/s, m3/h)
T Temperature (K, C)
T Time constant (s)
7
t Time (s)
U Electrical voltage (V)
V Volume (mm3, m3, l)
v Velcocity (m/s)
W Weighting factor (1) (see Electromagnetic Flowmeters)
Diameter ratio d/D ;1< (see Differential Pressure Measurement)
Thermal volume expansion coefficient (K-1)
Difference, spec. differential pressure p
Expansion coefficient (1)
Dynamic viscosity (Pa s)
Electrical conductivity (S/cm)
Resistance coefficient, coefficient of friction (1) (see Free Surface
Measurements)
Flow coefficient (1), (see Weir)
Kinematic viscosity (m2/s)
Density (kg/m3, g/cm3)
Magnetic flux (Wb, Vs)
Angular velocity (s-1)
Fr Froude number (1)
Re Reynolds number (1)
St Strouhal number (1)
VUZ Viscosity Influence Number (1)
8
Content Page
1 Introduction to the Physics of Flow Rate and Total Flow Measurements 13

1.1 Measured Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2 Fluid Mechanics Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.1 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.2 Reynolds Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.3 Flow Regimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.2.4 Flow Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2.5 Energy Equations and Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.6 Channel Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2 Flow Rate and Total Flow Measurement of Gases and Liquids . . . . . . . 29

2.1 Volume Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.1 Oval Gear Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.2 Oscillating Piston Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.3 Lobed Impeller Gas Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.1.4 Turbine Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.1.5 Vortex Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.1.6 Swirl Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.2 Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.2.1 Flowmeters for Differential Pressure Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.2.2 Compact Orifice Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.2.3 Wedge Meters for Critical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2.2.4 Pitot Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.2.5 Variable Area Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.2.6 Electromagnetic Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2.2.7 Ultrasonic Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.2.8 Coriolis Mass Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
2.2.9 Thermal Mass Flowmeters for Gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
2.3 Flow in Open Channels and Free Surface Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.3.1 Flow Measurement in Open Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.3.2 Flow Measurement in Free Surface Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3 Regulations and Requirements Regarding Quality, Environment,

Safety and Data Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3.1 Integrated Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3.2 Degrees of Protection per EN 60529 (Excerpts from the Standard Sheet) . 176
3.3 Requirements Regarding Interference Immunity (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
3.4 Explosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3.4.1 International Orientation of Explosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3.4.2 Terms and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.4.3 Types of Protection in Europe and North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
3.4.4 Approvals According to the FM Approval Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
3.4.5 Approvals in Accordance with the CSA Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
3.4.6 Free Movement of Goods Related to Explosion-Proof Electrical Devices . 197
9
3.4.7 Identification of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
3.5 GOST Approvals for Flow Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
3.5.1 Russia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
3.5.2 Belarus, Ukraine and Kazakhstan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.6 SIL - Functional Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
3.7 Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
3.8 Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
3.9 Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3.9.1 Standardized Pneumatic Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3.9.2 Standardized Electrical Analog Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3.9.3 Switch Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3.9.4 HART Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
3.9.5 Fieldbus in Process Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
3.9.6 FOUNDATION Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
3.10 Calibration and Official Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
3.10.1 Why Calibrate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
3.10.2 Terms and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
3.10.3 Methods of Flow Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
3.10.4 Test Bench for Liquid Flow Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
3.10.5 Test Bench for Gas Flow Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
3.10.6 Approvals of Test Benches and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
3.10.7 Calibration Possibilities at ABB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.10.8 Measuring Instruments Directive (MID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
3.10.9 OIML (Organisation Internationale de Mtrologie Lgale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4 Device Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

4.1 Flowmeters for Closed Pipings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.1.1 Influences of the Measuring Medium Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.1.2 Flow Regime Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4.1.3 Ranges of Application and Technical Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
4.1.4 Performance Specifications and Properties of the Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.1.5 Installation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4.2 Flowmeters for Channels and Free Surface Pipings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
4.2.1 Solids in the Measuring Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.2.2 Gas Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4.2.3 Flow Regime Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
5 Overview of the Outstanding Meter Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

5.1 Oval Gear Meters, Oscillating Piston Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.2 Lobed Impeller Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5.3 Turbine Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.4 Vortex Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5.5 Swirl Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.6 Differential Pressure Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.7 Variable Area Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5.8 Electromagnetic Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
10
5.9 Ultrasonic Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5.10 Coriolis Mass Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.11 Thermal Mass Flowmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.12 Weirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5.13 Venturi Flumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5.14 Electromagnetic Flowmeters in Culverts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.15 Electromagnetic Flowmeter FXP4000 for Partially Full Pipelines . . . . . . . . 276
6 Keywords for the Operating Conditions and Requirements

on the Measuring Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7 Standards and Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
8 Materials, Corrosion Resistance Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
9 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
11
1 Introduction to the Physics of Flow Rate and
Total Flow Measurements
1.1 Measured Variables
Measurement technology provides the tools for optimizing production processes and
dosing operations.In addition to pressure and temperature, the flow rate is one of the
most important measured variables. The quantitative determination of amount, volume,
and flow rate allows production processes to be optimized through control and regu-
lation.
The most important basic values are mass and volume:

Mass with the symbol m measured in kg or g
Volume with the symbol V measured in m3, dm3 or cm3
As a ratio of mass to volume the density defines the relationship between

both values:
Mass kg- ------kg ---------
g-
Density = ----------------------- : = m
----- --------- , ,
Volume V dm 3 m 3 cm 3
Since the majority of production systems operate continuously, the measured values
must be representative of the instantaneous conditions or indicate the instantaneous
values. Therefore, a time dependent value is necessary: the flow rate. Using the two
basic units, mass and volume, a distinction is made between the mass flow rate qm and
the volume flow rate qv:
kg
Mass
Mass flow rate = ---------------- : q m = m
----- ------ , g
--- , kg
------
Time t s s h
Volume m3 l m3
Volume flow rate = ----------------------- : q v = V
---- ------ , --- , ------
Time t s s h
Mass flow rate is the ideal measurement value because it is independent of pressure
and temperature, although volume flow rate is usually technically more convenient to
measure and, therefore, is preferred.
The volumes of the incompressible liquids are never affected by the pressure in the
ranges normally encountered. Temperature changes, however, result in volume
changes which in some cases require correction measures.
13
The corrected volume V2 is:
V 2 = V 1 ( 1+ T ) (1.1)
[K ] : thermal volume expansion coefficient

-1
T[K]: (specific fluid property) temperature
Modern flowmeters incorporate amplifiers which can apply calculated corrections to the
flow rate analogous to V2 . The effects of temperature and pressure are appreciably
greater for gas measurements. It is for this reason that these absolute measurements
are usually based on normal conditions, namely pn = 101325 Pa or 1.01325 bar and
Tn = 273 K. These absolute measurements at normal conditions (pn, Tn) also in some
regions called standard conditions (ps, Ts). This may confusing sometimes.
The normal volume Vn is:

273 1.013 + p
V n = V -------------------- ------------------------- (1.2)
273 + T 1.013
V = operating volume in m3
T = operating temperature in C
p = operating pressure in bar
The conversion from volume flowrate to the volume flow rate under normal conditions
(qv)n, can be calculated by the appropriate computer components.
The flow rate, which is a time dependent value, furnishes information regarding the in-
stantaneous conditions in the piping. It does not provide any information about the
mass or volume delivered, i.e. the total quantity. In order to determine these values, an
integration is required:
t2
V = t 1 q v dt (1.3a)
or
t2
m = t 1 q m dt (1.3b)
The flow rate represents the present while the volume or mass total represents the
past.
14
1.2 Fluid Mechanics Concepts
1.2.1 Viscosity
The viscosity of a fluid characterizes its ability to resist shape changes and is defined
as its resistance to shear forces. This is a result of the internal friction in the fluid caused
by the forces between the molecules. Since the molecular movement is related to the
temperature, the viscosity is also a function of the temperature. The absolute viscosity
in Pas (Pascal-second) is defined as follows: 1 Pascal-second is the absolute vis-
cosity of the laminar flow of a homogeneous fluid between two flat parallel layers
spaced 1 meter apart with a velocity difference of 1 m/s and in which a shear force of
1 Pascal exists.
The kinematic viscosity is a density related viscosity and has units of m /s: 2
= --- s m 3 ------
Pa m2
-------------------------- = - (1.4)
kg s
This fluid property, viscosity, also exists in gases. The values are appreciably smaller
than for liquids and increase with temperature. For liquids the viscosity reduces with
increasing temperature.
1.2.2 Reynolds Number

The Reynolds Number Re is a characteristic number utilized in similarity techniques.
With it, it is possible to project values measured with a particular flowing fluid to another
fluid with different viscosity and density values, but with similar geometric relationships:
dv
Re = ---------- [ 1 ] (1.5)

d: pipe diameter in m
v: average flow velocity in m/s:
: kinematic viscosity in m2/s
15
1.2.3 Flow Regimes
At low velocities and high viscosities the fluid flows in layers, meaning that the fluid par-
ticles move in well ordered adjacent sliding layers. This is known as laminar flow in
which the layers do not mix with one another.
d
v
Fig. 1-1: Laminar Flow Velocity Profile
The velocity distribution shows that the frictional forces at the stationary pipe wall exert
the highest retarding force and that from layer to layer the velocity increases to its max-
imum value, which occurs in the middle of the pipe.
If the velocity increases or the viscosity decreases an additional motion is superim-

posed on the axially oriented movement throughout the flow stream which moves in all
directions in a random manner and affects the flow streamlines in such a way that a
uniform velocity profile results. This is known as a turbulent flow. A boundary layer is
formed in the vicinity of the wall in which the velocity must accelerate from zero to v,
because of its adhesion at the wall. Therefore, the velocity profile in the outer region is
not steady.
Fig. 1-2: Turbulent Flow Velocity Profile
The evaluation-criterion for the kind of flow is the value of the Reynolds Number Re,
since it takes into consideration the essential factors v and .
The critical Reynolds number ReCr defines with reasonable accuracy the transition
point:
ReCr ~ 2300
16
Kind of flow Re < 2300 Re > 2300
Kind of flow laminar turbulent
Pressure drop in piping, measuring device small appreciable
Velocity profile parabolic approx. rectangular
Relationship of the average value of the flow 0.5 0.8...0.9
velocity to the maximum velocity at the center of
the pipe
Tab. 1-1: Flow Effects
Under ideal conditions the transition can occur at higher Reynolds numbers. This un-
stable condition changes immediately to the stable turbulent condition at the slightest
stimulus, e.g. due to a flow disturbance.
Almost all flowmeters operate at flow velocities in the turbulent range. In specific cases
may transitional flow as a mixture of laminar and turbulent flow, with e. g. turbulence in
the center of the pipe, and laminar flow near the edges appear.
1.2.4 Flow Separation

As already mentioned, there exists at the wall of the flow conduit a boundary layer in
which the flow velocity increases from zero to v. A projecting obstruction at the wall ex-
tends the length of the boundary layer and restrains the fluid even more in the vicinity
of the wall so that downstream of this restriction a dead zone with a slightly negative
pressure exists. The fluid flows from the region of higher velocity into this dead zone
and creates vortices.
Acceleration Restrain
ing
Vortex formation
Fig. 1-3: Dead Zone with Vortex Formation
17
The flow separates from the surface of the wall. Examples are shown in Fig. 1-4 and
Fig. 1-5. Vortices are undesirable for measurements because they consume energy
which is removed from the flow stream resulting in pressure drops. Furthermore, they
change the velocity profile to such a degree that many measuring methods will not
function.
A = Separation point
Separation point
Reverse flow Pressure increase
Fig. 1-4: Flow Separations and Fig. 1-5: Flow Separation and
Flow Profiles at a Flow Profiles at a Step
Continuous Expansion Restriction
Fig. 1-6 and Fig. 1-7 show the flow profiles after flow disturbances.
d
w
w
R
R
w D
w
Fig. 1-6: Flow Separations and Flow Profiles in a Curved Pipe
Separation
P1 A2
A w2
A1 w1 P2
P1
P1
F
1 Eddy water area 2
Fig. 1-7: Flow Separation and Flow Profiles at a Step Expansion
18
When a body is placed in the middle of a media flow, separation occurs and vortices
are formed on both sides if velocity or Re is above a certain value. It is interesting to
note, that after a vortex has formed on one side a similar vortex forms on the other side
which causes the first one to be shed.
Fig. 1-8: Karman Vortex Street
That periodic vortices are shed from each side alternately was discovered by Karman
after whom the vortex street is named. These usually undesirable vortices are utilized
as the basis for the measurement in vortex flowmeters.
1.2.5 Energy Equations and Flow Rate

The following energy types exist in a flowing liquid or gaseous medium:
Position energy
Potential energy <
Pressure energy
Kinetic energy
(Other energy types, e. g. electrical or chemical energy, are of no importance in this

context.)
There are:
Position energy: Pressure energy: Kinetic energy:
p v2
mgh m --- m -----
2
m = mass p = static pressure v = flow velocity
g = gravity = density
h = height
19
Their sum is:
v2
E = mgh+mp
--- + m ----- (1.6)
2
The Bernoulli law of conservation of energy states that the sum of the energy at every
location in the flow passage must remain constant (expansion must be considered for
compressible gases), when energy is neither externally added nor removed. Based on
the mass flow qm this yields:
v2
gh+p
--- + ----- = constant
2 (1.7)
This equation can be simplified because there are only minor position changes in a pip-
ing so that the potential energy can be neglected:
p v2
--- + ----- = constant (1.8)
2
Or, when comparing two reference points (Fig. 1-9):

p1 v12 p2 v22
----- + ------- = ----- + ------- (1.9)
2 2
p2
p1
v1 v2
Fig. 1-9: Piping Expansion
Rearranging equation (1.9), the basic equation for the pressure drop becomes:

p = p 1 p 2 = --- ( v 2 2 v 1 2 ) (1.10)
2
20
p1 p2
D d
Fig. 1-10: Piping Restriction
The piping restriction shown in Fig. 1-10 presents two different cross sections, with
diameters D and d, to the flow qv.
D2
q v = v ----------- = v A (1.11)
4
Based on the laws of continuity, the same mass flows through each cross section at
the same time, which means the same flow rate for incompressible fluids:
qv = v1 A1 = v2 A2
D2 d2
q v = v 1 ----------- = v 2 ----------- (1.12)
4 4
2
----- = ----
v1 d
v2 D
The area ratio m, a new term introduced here, thus results in:
2
m = ----
d
(1.13a)
D
m = v----1-
v2
(1.13b)
v1 = m v2
which when inserted in Equation (1.10):

p = --- ( v 2 2 m 2 v 2 2 ) = --- v 2 2 ( 1 m 2 ) (1.14)
2 2
21
Replacing v2 with:
q v- from (1.11)
v 2 = -----
A2
qv2
p = --------2 --- ( 1 m 2 ) (1.15)
A2 2
From this results the flow rate:
2 p -
q v = A 2 ------------------------ (1.16)
( 1 m2 )
A restriction of the flow cross section thus increases the flow velocity and reduces the
static pressure. This pressure drop is the differential pressure p, which is proportional
to the square of the flow rate.
q v 2 ~ p
(1.17)
q v ~ p
When the flow velocity is reduced to zero at an obstruction (bluff body), a pressure in-
crease occurs at this location because the kinetic energy is converted to pressure.
p1
p2
v1
Fig. 1-11: Flow Obstruction
At the center of the obstruction, at the stagnation point, the velocity is: v2 = 0
22
It follows from Equation (1.9):
2
p 0-2
-----1 + v1
p 2 + ----
-------- = -----
2 2 (1.18)

p2 = p1 + --- v 12
2
The total pressure p2 at the stagnation point is thus the total of the static pressure p1 and
the converted dynamic pressure:

Pdyn = --- v 1 2 .
2
Therefore, if both of these pressure values are known, then the flow velocity and thus
the pressure can be calculated from:
v = --2- ( p 2 p 1 ) (1.19)

This relationship is used to determine the flow velocity for stagnation pressure mea-
surements.
1.2.6 Channel Hydraulics
Flow in Open Channels

The elevation h, pressure p and velocity v energies are additive for a flow (Fig. 1-12) in
the cross section A according to the energy relationships of Bernoulli for a uniform ve-
locity distribution when the friction losses are neglected.
A
1
e 2
h H
h1
h2

Fig. 1-12: Sloped Open Channel
v2
E = m g h + m --p- + m ----- (1.6)
2
23
Neglecting the atmospheric pressure which is constant and does not influence this dis-
cussion and expressing the energy values as fluid heights the equation can be written
as:
v2
H = h + ------- = h + e (1.20)
2g
The expression:
v2
e = -------
2g
symbolizes the conversion of the kinetic energy into potential energy expressed as a
fluid elevation. The curve e is the energy line.
Based on the laws of continuity, the energy contents at points 1 and 2 must be the
same:
v12 v22
h 1 + ------- = h 2 + ------- (1.21)
2g 2g
To investigate the flow conditions for different slopes, the elevation difference is includ-
ed:
h 1 + l tan + v------
- = h 2 + v------
12 22
- (1.22a)
2g 2g
h 2 h 1 v--------------------
12 v22
- = l tan (1.22b)
2g
After simplification and algebraic rearrangement, the expression for the slope of the up-
per water surface for rectangular cross sections is:
h 2 h1 tan -
----------------- ------------------- (1.23)
l v2 -
1 ----------
gh
Substituting v = g h a noteworthy limiting velocity vlim is reached, the wave propaga-

tion velocity. It is identical to the propagation velocity of flat waves. In Equation 1.23 at
vlim, the term is:
v2 - = 0
1 ----------
gh
24
For the slope:
h 2 h1
----------------- =
l
this means that, under ideal conditions (e.g. frictionless operation) the slope is infinite.
The defining criterion is the Froude number Fr:
v -
Fr = -------------- (1.24)
gh
(Fr symbolizes the relationship between inertial and gravitational forces. Equation 1.24
applies to a special case: a rectangular cross section).
At wave propagation velocity vlim the value of Fr is 1. In the wave propagation velocity
condition a standing wave occurs which cannot move, neither upstream nor down-
stream.
If the velocity is smaller than vlim, the flow regime is known as subcritical. Waves can
propagate upstream and obstructions (e.g built-in items) in the flow stream can pro-
duce effects upstream of their location.
For velocities greater than vlim the flow regime is known as supercritical. In this case ob-
structions have an effect on the downstream flow and waves cannot propagate up-
stream.
Flow v2 Discharge Froude Velocity Kinetic Energy

e = -----
Regime 2g Number
h e
v2
Critical uniform Fr =1 v = gh - constant
-----
2g
h e 2
v
Subcritical retarded Fr < 1 v< gh - decreas-
-----
2g ing
h e v2
Supercritical accelerated Fr > 1 v> gh - increas-
-----
2g ing
Tab. 1-2: Flow Regime and Slopes
25
Transition from Subcritical to Supercritical
When a subcritical flow is accelerated it may become supercritical, a condition which
may be desirable in order to eliminate backflowing waves. This is the case in a Venturi
flume, for example.
Fig. 1-13 shows two examples:
The slope becomes steeper, the kinetic

energy increases, the flow changes from
subcritical to supercritical.
Damming upstream of a gate, the potential

energy increases, the velocity downstream
of the gate is so large that the flow becomes
supercritical. The same effect is achieved
by a lateral restriction.
Fig. 1-13: Accelerating Transition
Transition from Supercritical to Subcritical

A large portion of the kinetic energy of a supercritical flow must be decreased if subcrit-
ical flow is to be achieved. The flow velocity decreases and the water level increases.
In the subcritical flow regime a wave which moves upstream is produced which con-
verts a great deal of energy into heat.
Finally, when the velocities of the supercritical flow and the wave propagation are the
same, the wave moving at propagation velocity stands. This phenomenon is known as
a hydraulic jump which occurs often and becomes stabilized at a disturbance.
26
The slope decreases suddenly,
the liquid level rises, and in the
transition a hydraulic jump occurs
with an energy-absorbing rolling wave.
A similar effect occurs when a

positive step is encountered which
in itself requires additional energy.
A special case is the backflow

after a gate when the level down-
stream is high. The wave is formed
as an invisible hydraulic jump.
Fig. 1-14: Hydraulic Jump
Discharge form Large Openings or Rectangular Weirs

Rectangular Weir
According to Bernoulli the entire available energy is converted to kinetic energy for fric-
tionless discharge from an open vessel.
x X Vx
h h
dx Vmax.
Fig. 1-15: Rectangular Weir
27
At a depth x there is the discharge velocity:
vx = 2g x
Through the area Ax = b dx the flow qvx = Ax vx comes out:
q vx = b dx 2g x (1.25)
The following is valid for the entire opening:

h
qv = b 2g x dx (1.26a)
0
2
q v = --- b h 2g h
3
(1.26b)
2
q v = --- b 2g h 3 / 2
3
Losses actually occur in the discharge which are incorporated in the discharge coeffi-
cient :
2
q v = --- b 2g h 3 / 2 (1.27)
3
This equation forms the basis of the measurement calculation for meter tubes and mea-
suring channels.
28
2 Flow Rate and Total Flow Measurement of Gases
and Liquids
There are various different methods for measuring the flow rate and the total flow. Each
method has its own specific characteristics which are directed toward individual instal-
lation requirements. In the following, the most important measuring principles existing
in the market place are described and compared to each other.
Flowrate and Total Metering Instruments
In Closed Pipe Lines Open Channels and Free Surface Pipe Lines
Total Flow Meters Flowrate Flowrate

Totalizers Meters Meters
Direct Indirect
Volumetric Mass
(Displacement
Totalizers)
Oval Gear Turbine Differential Rectangular Venturi Electro-

Mass Meter
Meter Meter Press. Meter and V-Notch Flume magnetic
Coriolis
Rotary Vane Weirs Meter Flowmeter
Oscillating Meter
Woltman Variable
Piston Meter
Meter Area
Flowmeter Mass
Spiral Gear Meter
Lobed Meter Thermal
Impeller
Meter Electro-
magnetic
Vortex Flowmeter
Flowmeter
Swirl Ultrasonic
Meter Flowmeter
In the illustration above for the measurement in closed piping a distinction is made
between total flow meters (totalizers) and flow rate meters (flowmeters). So, what are
the characteristics of these two variants?
29
Total flow meters, usually volume totalizers, are devices filled with a defined volume
which is then measured and integrated to determine the total flow volume. Direct vol-
ume totalizers have movable measuring chambers with a defined volume (comparable
to a line of buckets). Indirect volume totalizers, on the contrary, do not have closed
measuring chambers, but work either mechanically using rotary vanes and transporting
partial volumes between the vanes, or electrically with pulses that are proportional to
the volume.
Flowmeters also use the direct method for measured value acquisition. They measure
either the flow velocity or the kinetic energy of the flow.
The user faces the difficult task of selecting the technically best and most cost effective
measuring device for his application. The following device descriptions and selection
criteria are intended to assist in that choice.
2.1 Volume Totalizers

Volume totalizers with moving measuring chambers driven by the measuring medium
are also known as displacement meters. They are suitable for both gases and liquids.
They are direct volume totalizers since they transport the measuring medium in cham-
bers with defined, geometrically limited volumes.
Among the direct volume totalizers are those with measuring vanes also called tur-
bine totalizers and volume totalizers with forced flow changes. In this method a pulse
total is generated which represents a specific not geometrically bounded volume,
for example the quantity which produces one complete revolution of a rotary vane to-
talizer.
2.1.1 Oval Gear Totalizers

The measuring element of an oval gear totalizer consists of two oval gears.
Fig. 2-1: Method of Operation of an Oval Gear Totalizer
30
The driving liquid produces the required torque, which varies as a function of the gear
position, to rotate the gears.
For example, the torques on the lower gear in the left side of Fig. 2-1 cancel each other
while the torque on the upper gear is one sided and actually causes the rotation.
Around the upper gear a bounded crescent like volume exists which is pushed towards
the outlet of the meter. Each rotation of the pair of oval gears transports a defined liquid
volume.
The number of rotations is therefore an exact measure of the quantity of liquid which
has flowed through the meter. The precision teeth assure a good seal between the two
gears. The clearance between the oval gears and the walls of the measuring chambers
is so small that the leakage flow (gap loss) is negligible.
Fig. 2-2: Oval Gear Totalizer for Industrial Liquids, Design with Counter
The rotations of the pair of oval gears are transmitted without a stuffing box to an indi-
cator either by a permanent magnet coupling or by a feedback-free magnetic field con-
trolled pulse transmitter.
The gears and bearings are subject to mechanical wear. Through selection of materials
for the housing, oval gears, and bearings as well as by design consideration of expan-
sions due to high temperatures, oval gear totalizers are suitable for almost all operating
conditions.
The error limits shown in Fig. 2-3 represent the relationship to the measuring medium,
especially as a function of its viscosity. For low viscosities and a given accuracy the
span is appreciably smaller than for higher viscosities.
31
0.5
1 Lubricating oil 3000 mPa s
Measuring error [%]

2 Heating oil EL
1 3 Benzine
0 2
3
-0.5
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Flow [% Qmax]
Fig. 2-3: Representation of the Error Limits as a Function of the Measuring Medium
It is comprehensible that the pressure drop increases with increasing viscosity. The
pressure drop curves (Fig. 2-4) include the meter size as an additional parameter.
Pressure drop [bar]
30000
20000 40000
15000
00
60000
50
0
1000
00
*) Viscosity in mPa s
20
for a density of 0.9

0
100
350*)
5 10 15 20 25
0|5 DN 25
0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0|10 DN 25
0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 3.6 4.2 4.8
50 100 150 200 250 300
0|50 DN 50
3 6 9 12 15 18
100 200 300 400 500 600 700
0|200 DN 80
6 12 18 24 30 36 42
200 400 600 800 1000 1200
0|400 DN 100
12 24 36 48 60 72
[l/min]
Flow rate
[m/h]
Fig. 2-4: Pressure Drop as a Function of Viscosity
Specifications
Nominal diameters DN 6...DN 400
Max. possible flow rate 1200 m2/h
Viscosity 0.3...1 105 mPa s
Max. permissible pressure 100 bar
Max. permissible temperature 290 C
Approved for official verification
32
2.1.2 Oscillating Piston Totalizers
In a cylindrical housing a hollow cylinder, the oscillating piston, oscillates eccentrically.
In this manner it transports defined volumes. The method of operation is shown in Fig.
2-5.
5
V1 V2 4
3
E A 2
1
a b c d
Fig. 2-5: Method of Operation of the Oscillating Piston Totalizer
The stationary outer cylinder (4) is also the housing, in which a dividing wall (1) and a
guide ring (3) are mounted. The dividing wall on the bottom of the housing provides the
boundary between the inlet (E) and outlet (A) openings. The bearing for the oscillating
piston (5) is mounted in the sleeve (2) and is guided along the dividing wall. Openings
for filling and draining are located in its base. In positions (a) and (b) the oscillating pis-
ton volume V2 is filled. The liquid forces the oscillating piston away so that the housing
volume V1 can be filled. At the same time the force from the piston causes the portion
of the liquid volume V1 in the right side to be discharged. When position (d) is reached,
the volume V1 has been completely discharged once and refilled, the volume V2 begins
its discharge phase. One rotation of the oscillating piston encompasses both volumes,
V1 and V2.
Fig. 2-6: Oscillating Piston Totalizer for Water (Type RONDO DIRECT) with Various Nominal
Diameters
33
The movement of the piston bearing (2) is transmitted to an indicator using a magnet
and follower arrangement. A magnetic coupling is not utilized in the RONDO DIRECT
Oscillating Piston Totalizer. The rotary motion of the piston is transmitted directly from
the piston to the totalizer.
Since the oscillating piston wears rapidly, proper material selection is very important.
Various materials are available such as gray cast iron, bronze, hard rubber, carbon and
plastics. For high temperature operation an intermediate spacer is used to provide ad-
ditional separation from the totalizer. Oscillating piston totalizers are especially used for
water and oil measurement.
Measuring error [%]
1 100mPa s
0.5 1 2 5mPa s
3 1mPa s
2 4 0.5mPa s
0 3 5 0.25mPa s
4
-0.5 5
0 10 25 50 75 100
Flow rate [Qmax]
Meas. range 1:5
(for liquefied gas)
Measuring range 1:10
Fig. 2-7: Representation of the Measuring Error as a Function of the Viscosity
The error curves in Fig. 2-7 indicate the high accuracy attainable at high viscosity due
to a decrease in leakage losses (gap losses). The oscillating piston totalizers are still
operational at viscosities as high as 10,000 mPas.
34
3.0
10000mPa s
5000
2.8
2.6 Overload operation
2000
2.4
2.2
2.0
00
10
1.8
0
1.6
80
1.4
0
1.2 50
1.0 0
30
0.8 0
20 0
0.6 10 s
0.4 Pa
1m
0.2
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000
Q[l/min]
0 100 200 300 400 500
Q[l/min]
0 20 40 60 80 100
Q[l/min]
Fig. 2-8: Pressure Drop as a Function of Viscosity at DN 80
Fig. 2-8 shows that the pressure drop increases with increasing viscosity. For large dif-
ferential pressures the material used for the oscillating piston must be checked for suf-
ficient mechanical strength.
Specifications
Max. possible flow rate 1000 m3/h
Viscosity 0.3...2 104 mPas
Max. permissible pressure PN 100
Max. permissible temperature 300 C
35
2.1.3 Lobed Impeller Gas Totalizers
Two rotating impellers, designed with a figure eight cross section, rotate in opposite di-
rections due to the forces exerted by the gas being measured. The shape of the impel-
lers prevents contact while the gap between them remains constant.
Fig. 2-9: Method of Operation of the Lobed Impeller Gas Totalizer
A gear drive external to the measuring chamber synchronizes the impellers. During
each rotation four crescent shaped volumes are moved through the measuring cham-
ber. The number of rotations is proportional to the gas flow. The rotation is coupled us-
ing an adjustable fine tooth gear train to the totalizer.
Fig. 2-10: Lobed Impeller Gas Totalizer
An unmeasured flow, which is a function of the pressure drop, flows through the gaps.
The negative error is compensated by an adjustment. The viscosity of gases increases
at high pressures and reduces the losses in the gaps which compensates for the higher
losses which would otherwise exist due to the higher pressure difference.
36
The pulsations in the gas discharge can cause the pipe system connected to the meter
to vibrate. If resonance should occur, loud noises and sudden pressure drops can re-
sult. This condition should not be allowed to occur; if necessary noise or pulsation
dampers should be utilized.
Pressure drop [mbar]

3
0
[Qmax]
Fig. 2-11: Pressure Drop of the Lobed Impeller Gas Totalizer
The pressure drop results from the mechanical and dynamic resistances in the meter.
The dynamic portion increases appreciably with increasing load.
Lobed impeller meters are very susceptible to contamination. Since contamination af-
fects the pressure drop it must be monitored and the meter cleaned when required.
Specifications
Flow rate between 3 m3/h and 6500 m3/h (gas at operating conditions)
Pressure rating max. PN 25
Operating temperature -10...40 C
Span up to 1:50
Error limit within the permissible limits for official verification, i.e. < 1 %
37
2.1.4 Turbine Totalizers
Turbine totalizers are indirect volume totalizers in which the flow causes a vaned rotor
to revolve. The number of rotor revolutions is proportional to the total flow and the fre-
quency of the revolutions to the flow rate.
The various designs are differentiated by the direction of the inflow and by the method
utilized for measured value acquisition.
Rotary Vane Totalizer

The flow entry is tangential and causes the wheel to revolve in the rotary vane totalizer.
A gear train is utilized to transmit the rotations of the wheel axle to the totalizer which,
in wetted designs, is located in the measuring medium. Rotary vane totalizers are avail-
able as single jet (Fig. 2-12a) and as multijet designs (Fig. 2-12b).
a b
Fig. 2-12: Rotary Vane Totalizer
Dry design units separate the indicator chamber from the measuring chamber and
transmit the rotation via a magnetic coupling. Rotary vane totalizers are used as do-
mestic water meters and also, in hot water design, as volume measuring elements for
smaller heat quantity totalizers.
Lower Upper measuring range

Measuring range
measuring range
Nominal rating
separation
lower limit
Range
5
Measuring
error [%]
-5
0.4 1 3 10 100
Flow rate [%]
Fig. 2-13: Error Curve of a Multijet Rotary Vane Totalizer
38
Fig. 2-13 shows the error curve with reference to the limits specified in the German Ver-
ification Act, i.e. 2 % (cold water)/ 3 % (warm water) in the upper and lower mea-
suring range.
Specifications
Nominal sizes (based on the flow rate) 0.6...15 m3/h
Smallest possible flow rate 12 l/h
Largest possible flow rate 30 m3/h
Viscosity limit 5 mPas
Fig. 2-14: Cross Section of a Single Jet Totalizer (Type PICOFLUX)
Fig. 2-15: Cross Section of a Multijet Totalizer (Type OPTIMA ARTIST)
39
Woltman Totalizer
The axle of a Woltman totalizer rotor is in parallel with the flow direction. This means
the flow is axial to the turbine wheel. A low-friction gear train connects the axle to the
totalizer via a magnetic coupling.
WP WS
Fig. 2-16: Woltman-Zhler
There are two distinct designs, one with a horizontal turbine wheel WP and one with
a vertical turbine wheel WS. The vertical design offers the advantage of minimal bear-
ing friction and therefore a higher sensitivity. The pressure drop however is appreciably
higher because of the shape of the flow passage. The horizontal design allows the to-
talizer to be mounted in any orientation (e.g. vertical), a larger flow range and lower
pressure drops.
10
Measuring error [%]
5
WS
2
0 WP
-2
Nominal rating
-5
separation
-10 Meas.
range
Range
lower
limit
0 100
Flow rate [%]
Fig. 2-17: Typical Error Curve of a Woltman Totalizer with Nominal Diameter DN 80
The error curve shown in Fig. 2-17 is related to the calibration error limits. The Woltman
totalizer is used primarily as a water meter, but also as a volume measuring element
for heat quantity totalizers.
40
Fig. 2-18: Cross Section of a WP Woltman Totalizer (Type HELIX)
Fig. 2-19: Cross Section of a WS Woltman Totalizer (Type VERTIX)
41
The combination water totalizer WPV (Fig. 2-20) was designed for wide spans. It is a
combination of two totalizers, a large (main totalizer) and a small (secondary) one. An
automatic pressure controlled spring loaded valve switches to the range that is best
suited for the measuring ranges of both totalizers.
Fig. 2-20: Combination Water Totalizer (Type INLINE) with Secondary Totalizer (Type MODUL-
METER MO-N)
While the cold water meters have an upper temperature limit of 40 C (50 C), the hot
water meter can be used up to 120 C (130 C). With appropriate material selections
the Woltman totalizer can also be used in industrial applications for de-ionized water.
Specifications
Design WP WS WPV
Nominal diameters DN 40...DN 500 DN 50...DN 150 DN 50...DN 200
Smallest possible flow rate 350 l/h 200 l/h 20 l/h
Largest possible flow rate 4500 m3/h 350 m3/h 600 m3/h
Turbine Flowmeter
Turbine wheel totalizers WP, commonly known as turbine flowmeters, are similar in
their design to Woltman totalizers, with one essential difference: the measurement of
the rotation is made electrically with almost no feedback on the rotor. The turbine rotors
are light in weight producing minimal friction in the bearings.
42
1 Housing
2 Guide body
3 Rotor
4 Bearing
5 Outlet
6 Electrical connections
Fig. 2-21: Turbine Flowmeter
As a result, the span can be expanded because the system responds with greater sen-
sitivity. Smaller nominal diameters are possible. The turbine flowmeter measures gas-
es and liquids with increased viscosities.
A coil in the housing opposite the rotor measures the signal using various methods:
A magnet in one vane induces a voltage pulse in the coil during every revolution.
The coil encloses a magnet. The vanes are made of a ferromagnetic material. As the
vanes pass the magnet, the magnetic field is distorted inducing a voltage pulse.
A high-frequency AC voltage (10 kHz) is applied to the coil. The ferromagnetic vane
varies the amplitude of the supply voltage resulting in a secondary frequency super-
imposed on the carrier frequency.
In all three cases, a frequency signal is generated which is proportional to the number
of revolutions and therefore to the flowrate. The signal is fed to a preamplifier in the
connected converter. In this manner the totalizer, each of whose individual pulses rep-
resents a defined volume, becomes a flowmeter as a result of the time based frequency
which is generated.
43
Interesting is the fact that this device can measure at higher viscosities, with the restric-
tion, however, that the start of the linear proportional range is shifted (Fig. 2-22).
Measuring error [%]
1 1 20-50mPa s
2 10-20mPa s
2 3 6-10mPa s
3 4 2-6mPa s
4 5 0.7-2mPa s
5 6 0.2-0.7mPa s
6
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Flow rate Q [% of QNom]
Fig. 2-22: Error Curves as a Function of Viscosity
The span is reduced as the viscosity increases. It is for this reason that for higher vis-
cosities a calibration curve, which is not linear, must be prepared.
Specifications
Smallest possible flow rate 5 l/h (water)
Largest possible flow rate 10,000 m3/h (water)
Max. span 1:100
Temperatures -200 C (cryogenic liquid) up to 250 C (600 C)
Pressure rating up to 100 bar (1000 bar)
Error limits + 0.25 %...+1 % of rate
44
A special turbine flowmeter variation is the turbine gas totalizer for measuring large gas
flows. The gas flow velocity is increased by a reducer at the inlet with a ring shaped
cross section and guided over the freely turning rotor. The revolutions which are mea-
sured are mechanically transmitted to the totalizer using a gear train.
This instrument is often used for the custody transfer of natural gas for which it has re-
ceived certification approval.
Specifications
Smallest possible flow rate 2.5 m3/h (at operating conditions)
Largest possible flow rate 25,000 m3/h
Span 1:20
Calibration error limits +1 % of rate (span 1:5)
Temperature limits -10...50 C
2.1.5 Vortex Flowmeters

Why does the flag flap in the breeze? Why does a taut line (power line) sing in the wind?
There are numerous examples of the effects of vortex formation at bodies around which
there is flow. What is actually happening?
As already mentioned in Chapter 1.2.4 a flow obstruction causes vortices. On a free

standing body vortices are formed on both sides which are alternately shed resulting in
the formation of a Karman Vortex Street. The flag mentioned above reacts to the
progress of the vortex street, the taut wire vibrates at the vortex shedding frequency.
1 2
1 Bluff body
2 Piezo-sensor
Fig. 2-23: Measuring Principle of a Vortex Flowmeter
45
If the geometric distance is l between two consecutive vortices and the time interval is
t when viewed from a fixed reference point, then the vortex shedding frequency f is:
I
f-
t
Strouhal discovered a relationship between geometry and velocity:

v
f ---
d
In this equation, d is the diameter of the round bluff body. The Strouhal number St, a
proportionality constant named after Strouhal, gives:
v
f = St ---
d
The requirement for the bluff body is that the geometry of vortex formation does not
change with the flow rate and that the Strouhal number remains constant over a wide
Reynolds number range. The shape and the area ratio in the pipe define the manner
of vortex shedding and the constancy of the Strouhal number. Another system require-
ment is assigned by the flow engineer: that the vortex intensity be strong. Finally, the
pressure drop should not be too large.
Strouhal number [St]
Linear
flow range
v
d
Reynolds number [Re]
Fig. 2-24: Delta Bluff Bodies and the Dependence of the Strouhal Number on the Reynolds
Number
46
The optimum shape of the bluff body has been determined empirically and through cal-
culations. ABB has selected the delta shape.
The minimum Reynolds number value Remin defines the lower range value, i.e. the span
decreases with increasing viscosity. The upper Re limit is so high that it is negligible for
the upper range value.
There are various methods of vortex determination. The vortices generate periodic
pressure and velocity variations. These provide a corollary means for the measure-
ment. ABB places the sensor either behind the bluff body or in the bluff body in such a
manner that it can vibrate freely (the location is determined by the nominal diameter
and the type of connection). Its tongue is forced to vibrate at the shedding frequency
by the pressure differences.
Piezo-elements inside the sensor convert the resulting pressure forces into electrical
measuring pulse signals which can be amplified. An arrangement of four Piezo-sensors
has been selected to cancel pipeline vibrations.
Fig. 2-25: Sensor in the Vortex Flowmeter
If the flow profile of the measuring medium is distorted (vortices, swirl) as it flows into
the measuring section, the vortices cannot form properly. For this reason, straight
steadying sections must be provided upstream of the device, the length of which de-
pends on the type of the distortion.
Vortex flowmeters can be used for measuring the flow of steam, gases and liquids.
The model with integral mount design, FV4000-VT4 (Fig. 2-28), integrates the sensor
and transmitter in a single unit with a local indicator for the flow rate and totalized flow
value. The transmitter is based on a digital signal processor (DSP) and generates the
4...20 mA analog output signal. As a two-wire device it requires a supply voltage of
14 V...46 V DC which is fed via the analog output two-wire line.
47
A binary output is available in addition to the analog output. This output can be config-
ured as a pulse output or limit contact (contact output). The measurement display for
gases and liquids is made in direct reading engineering units.
1
UM
+ 1 Supply power
- US
2 Power supply unit
3 3 Analog output
RB R 4 Binary output
2 5 Switch amplifier
4
R
5
Fig. 2-26: Two-Wire Connection Diagram
Utilizing an integrated Pt 100 in the flow sensor, a saturated steam measurement or

temperature monitoring option can be incorporated without any additional costs.
Fig. 2-27: Sensor for Flow Rate (F) and Temperature (T) Measurement
Fig. 2-28: Integral Mount Design: FV4000-VT4 Fig. 2-29: Remote Mount Design: FV4000-VR
Flange-Mounted Wafer-Type Design
48
The transmitter can also be mounted remotely at a distance from the sensor if a special
cable (Fig. 2-29) is used. It can be attached to the wall or installed using a pipe mount-
ing toolkit.
Two-Wire Design with Fieldbus Interface

The transmitter is designed in two-wire technology, i.e. the power supply and the digital
communication of the fieldbus interface utilize the same cable. In parallel, a switch out-
put is available for limit value or system monitoring. In the event of a power failure all
stored data are saved in a nonvolatile memory.
The Asset Vision Basic device management tool can be used for operating and config-
uring intelligent field instruments, utilizing the FDT/DTM technology. A data exchange
with a complete range of field instruments can be accomplished over various commu-
nication paths. The main operational purposes are the parameter display, configura-
tion, diagnostics and data management for all intelligent field devices which them-
selves satisfy the communication requirements.
PROFIBUS PA Communication
The transmitter is suited for connection to a DP/PA segment coupler.
PROFIBUS PA Protocol
Function blocks: 2 x Al, 1 x TOT
GSD files: -PA139700 (1 x Al)
(device data files) -PA139740 (1 x AI, 1 x TOT)
-ABB_05DC (2 x Al, 1 x TOT + manufacturer-specific data)
49
Physical Block
Analog Input
Block AI 1
Channel-
selector
Analog Input
Transducer Block AI 2
Block
(Flow rate, PROFIBUS PA
temperature*) Channel-
selector
Totalizer
Block
*) Option
Fig. 2-30: Block Structure of the FV4000 with PROFIBUS PA
The channel selector allows to select the output variable (volume / standard / mass flow
or temperature).
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Communication

The transmitter is suited for connection to a special power supply unit or linking device.
FOUNDATlON Fieldbus Protocol

Output signal according to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol
Function blocks: 2 x Al
50
Resource Block
Analog Input FF compatible

Block AI 1 communication
stack
Channel-
Transducer selector
Block
(Flow rate, Analog Input FOUNDATION
temperature*) Block AI 2 Fieldbus
Channel-
selector
*) Option
Fig. 2-31: Block Structure of the FV4000 with FOUNDATION FieIdbus
The channel selector allows to select the output variable (volume / standard / mass
flow, totalizer or temperature).
Device Selection
Vortex flowmeters are available with the nominal diameters DN 15 to DN 300.
ABB provides at no cost, resource material to help in the selection and sizing of devices
suitable for a particular measurement task, as well as order support.
51
Dimensioning of the Measuring Ranges

Nominal Diameter Water = 1000 kg m 3 Gas = 1, 2 kg m 3
v = 1 10 6 m 2 s = 18, 2 10 6 Pa s
DN inch Span [m3/h] Span [m3/h]

15 0.5...6 4...24
25 1 0.8...18 14...150
40 1 2.4...48 30...390
50 2 3.0...70 40...500
80 3 8.0...170 90...1200
100 4 10.0...270 150...1900
150 6 30.0...630 300...4500
200 8 70.0...1100 250...8000
250 10 60.0...1700 800...14000
300 12 95.0...2400 1400...20000
Tab. 2-1: Vortex Flowmeter FV4000, Measuring Ranges
The values in the table are intended to be used as references. The seen from the
physical point of view actually achievable lower range values primarily depend on the
operating density or viscosity of the measuring medium and the presence/absence of
vibrations and/or pulsations. The measuring ranges for which the specified accuracy is
reached depend on the minimum required Reynolds number, as below this number no
linear relationship can be established between the vortex shedding frequency and the
flow velocity.
52
To avoid cavitation, a positive pressure must be maintained in the measuring section
which can be calculated as follows:
p 2 1.3 p D + 2.6 p
p2 = Static gauge pressure downstream of the device
pD = Steam pressure of liquid at operating temperature
p = Pressure drop (diagram Fig. 2-32)
When selecting devices for gas or steam measurement, it must be taken into account
that the values in the table refer to air and that the vortex flowmeter measures in units
at operating conditions. For this reason, first the operating density must be calculated:
1.013 + p 273
= N ------------------------- ---------------------- (2.2)
1.013 273 + T
(N = Standard density)
Then the flow rate in units at operating conditions is calculated:

1 N
q v = --- q m or q v = q n ------ (2.3)

qm = Mass flow rate in kg/h
qn = Standard flow in m3/h
Based on the fact that a bluff body exists in the inside of a vortex flowmeter, a pressure
drop occurs which is a function of the flow rate (Fig. 2-32).
Example: 425 mbar

p [mbar]
1000
100
0
DN 0
DN 50
0
15
25
40
50
80
10
15
20
30
2
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
10
1
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Qv [m3/h]
Fig. 2-32: Pressure Drop for Water, DIN-Design
53
100.00
p [mbar] 10.00
DN 0
DN 50
0
0
15
25
40
50
80
10
20
30
15
2
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
1.00
0.10
1.0 10.0 100.0 1000.0 10000.0 100000.0
Qv [m3/h]
Fig. 2-33: Pressue Drop for Air (20 C, 1.013 bar), DIN-Design
For saturated steam measurement a special program is integrated in the transmitter

which contains the saturated steam tables utilized for correction calculations. With the
integrated temperature measurement the measurement can be made with minimum ef-
fort. The mass flow rate signal is available directly at the analog output.
Specifications
Temperature limits -55...400 C (meas. medium temperature)
-55...70 C (ambient temperature)
Max. possible pressure 160 bar
Measured error 1 % of rate for gas, steam
0.75 of rate for liquids
Medium-wetted material 1.4571, optional Hastelloy-C
Explosion protection ATEX / IECEx II 2 G Ex ib II C T4
ATEX / IECEx II 2 G Ex d II C T6
ATEX / IECEx II 2D T 85 C...Tmed IP 67
FM Class I Div1, Group A, B, C, D
54
Installation of the Sensor
The following recommendations should be observed when installing the sensor in a
piping:
15D 5D
25D 5D
Fig. 2-34: Inlet and Outlet Sections
5D
Fig. 2-35: Installation Location of Control Valve
55
Fig. 2-36: Mounting Position for High Temperatures, Measuring Medium Temperature > 150 C
T
P
3...5D 2...3D
Fig. 2-37: Measuring Points for Pressure (p) and Temperature (T)
56
2.1.6 Swirl Flowmeters
A guide body whose shape is similar to a stationary turbine rotor is located in the inlet
of the measuring device. The measuring medium is forced to rotate and flows through
the meter tube of the swirl flowmeter in a thread like rotation.
Fig. 2-38: Cross Section of a Swirl Flowmeter
2 3
1 Inlet guide body
2 Piezo-sensor
1
3 Outlet guide body
4 Housing
5 Reversal point
Fig. 2-39: Flow in a Swirl Flowmeter
The swirl stabilizes in the cylindrical section of the meter tube. A consideration of the
cross sections in this region shows that the rotational velocity at the wall is relatively
small and increases toward the tube center until a stable vortex core is formed at the
center. During the transition of the flow into the expanding section of the tube the vortex
core is displaced because a backflow occurs in the expander section.
57
The vortex core forms a spiral like secondary rotation whose frequency is linearly pro-
portional to the flow rate over a wide range. This secondary rotation is measured with
a Piezo-sensor. The Piezo-sensor utilizes the resultant pressure differences for its
pulse measurements.
The same sensors are used in both the swirl and vortex flowmeters. The vortex shed-
ding frequency is between 1 and 2000 Hz; the higher frequencies indicating higher flow
rates.
In the transmiter the sensor signals are converted into further processable outputs. The
same transmitters as described for the vortex flowmeters are used.
Fig. 2-40: Integral Mount Design: Fig. 2-41: Remote Mount Design:
FS4000-ST4 FS4000-SR4
Swirl flowmeters can be used for measuring the flow of liquids, gases and steam.
Measuring range
Remax=Momax perm.
[K]
5150
5100
5050
1%
5000
4950
4900
6 8 4 2 34 6 8 5 2 34 6 8 6 2 34
10 10 10
[Re]
Fig. 2-42: Calibration Curve of a Swirl Flowmeter
58
Fig. 2-42 shows a typical calibration curve of a swirl flowmeter. On the ordinate is plotted
the K-factor in pulses per volumetric unit versus the Reynolds number on the abscissa.
A semi-dimensionless presentation is practical because the values related to the mea-
suring medium can be expressed by the Reynolds number. This demonstrates for ex-
ample, that the lower range value for higher viscosities increases and thereby reduces
the linear span. Of course it is also possible to measure values in the nonlinear range.
Viscosities of up to 30 m Pas are permissible, depending on the nominal diameter.
Each measuring device has its own calibration curve which is considered as its con-
stant property; it will only change when the shape of the measuring section is mechan-
ically deformed. By using the reduced spans resulting from application conditions a bet-
ter accuracy can be achieved than for the entire span of 0.5 % of rate.
Using a 5-point linearization for the calibration curve of a DSP-controlled transmitter,

an accuracy of 0.5% of rate can be achieved for liquids, gases and steam.
The special advantage of a swirl flowmeter over other systems is the fact that it requires
only short inlet and outlet sections. It is recommended to use inlet and outlet sections
of 3D/1D to assure that the accuracy specifications can be achieved.
Nominal Diameter Water = 1000 kg m 3 Gas = 1.2 kg / m 3

v = 1 10 m s
6 2 = 18.2 10 6 Pa s
DN inch Span [m3/h] Span [m3/h]

15 0.1...1.6 2.5...16
20 0.2...2 2.5...25
25 1 0.4...6 5...50
32 1 0.8...10 7...130
40 1 1.6...16 12...200
50 2 2.5...25 18...350
80 3 3.5...100 60...850
100 4 5.0... 50 65...1500
150 6 15.0...370 150...3600
200 8 25...500 200...5000
300 12 100...1000 400...10000
400 16 180...1800 1000...20000
Tab. 2-2: Swirl Flowmeters, Measuring Ranges in m3/h (qv)
The values in the table are intended to be used as references. The seen from the
physical point of view actually achievable lower range values primarily depend on the
operating density or viscosity of the measuring medium and the presence/absence of
vibrations and/or pulsations. The measuring ranges for which the specified accuracy is
reached depend on the minimum required Reynolds number, as below this number no
linear relationship can be established between the vortex shedding frequency and the
flow velocity.
59
Device Selection
Swirl flowmeters are with the nominal diameters DN 15...DN 400. Tab. 2-2 shows the
corresponding measuring ranges. For liquid measurements the maximum flow velocity
is 6 m/s, for gases it is 50 m/s.
ABB provides, at no cost, resource material to help in the selection and sizing of devic-
es suitable for a particular measurement task, as well as order support.
It is important to avoid cavitation when measuring liquids. Sufficient static pressure

must exist in the measuring section for this reason. To assure satisfactory operation
the following check should be made:
p 2 1.3 p D + 2.6 p
p2 = Static gauge pressure downstream of the device
pD = Steam pressure of liquid at operating temperature
p = Pressure drop (diagram)
p [mbar]
1000
100
10
0
0
0
DN 15
DN 0
25
DN 32
DN 40
50
DN 0
10
15
20
30
40
2
8
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
0.1
1 10 100 1000 10000 100000
Qv [m3/h]
Fig. 2-43: Pressure Drop for Air (22 C; 1,013 mbar, = 1.205 kg/m3)
60
Example: 300 mbar
p [mbar]
10000.0
1000.0 DN 400
DN 300
DN 200
DN 150
100.0
DN 100
DN 80
DN 50
DN 40
10.0 DN 32
DN 25
DN 20
DN 15
1.0
0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00
Qv [m3/h]
Fig. 2-44: Pressure Drop for Water (20 C, 1,013 mbar, = 998 kg/m3)
When selecting flowmeters for gas measurements, a conversion to the values at oper-
ating conditions is required.
1.013 + p 273
= N ------------------------- -------------------- (2.4)
1.013 273 + T
= Operating density (kg/m3)
N = Standard density (kg/m3)
p = Operating pressure (bar)
T = Operating temperature (C)
qv = Operating flow rate (m3/h)
qN = Standard flow (m3/h)
N
q v = q N ------ (2.5)

The calculation can be made automatically in the transmitter.
61
Transmitter
The transmitter used for the swirl flowmeter is the same as the one described for the
vortex flowmeter.
Specifications
Temperature limits -55...280 C (meas. medium temperature)
-55...70 C (ambient temperature)
Measured error 0.5 % of rate
Medium-wetted materials 1.4571 (Hastelloy C)
Explosion protection ATEX / IECEx II 2 G Ex ib II C T4
ATEX / IECEx II 2 G Ex d II C T6
ATEX / IECEx II 2D T 85 C...Tmed IP 67
FM Class I Div1, Group A, B, C, D
62
Installation of the Sensor
The following recommendations should be observed when installing the sensor in a
piping:
No inlet and outlet sections are required if the radius of curvature for single or double
elbows in the inlet or outlet is greater than 1.8 x D.
No additional inlet and outlet pipe sections are required for flanged reducers per DIN
28545 (/2 = 8) installed in the outlet. Fig. 2-45 shows the recommended inlet and out-
let sections for different boundary conditions at the installation location.
3D 1D
3D 1D
min 1.8 D
3D 1D
5D 1D
3D 3D
Fig. 2-45: Inlet and Outlet Sections
63
Fig. 2-46: Mounting Position for High Measuring Medium Temperatures > 150 C
Multivariable Devices
Devices, which measure more that one physical variable are referred to as multivari-
able measuring devices. They can be provided with an optional Pt 100 for integrated
temperature measurement directly in the sensor.
To convert the flow measurements to normal or mass units in many instances an addi-
tional temperature measurement is all that is required, e.g. for saturated steam or for
gas measurements when the pressure remains constant.
Compensation of Pressure Effects

Integrated Temperature Measurement
Measuring the temperature and the flow rate at the same location provides appreciable
advantages:
High accuracy through optimal positioning of the temperature sensor
No cabling
Short response time
Fig. 2-47: Sensor for Flow Rate (F) and Temperature (T) Measurement
64
Pressure and Temperature Compensation
If the process conditions are such that pressure variations occur or the measuring me-
dium is superheated steam, then an integrated temperature measurement alone is not
sufficient to convert the gas flow volume measurements to mass, standard or steam
mass flow values. For these applications swirl and vortex flowmeters in conjunction
with flow computer units are the best choice. The power supply is realized via the flow
computer unit.
Flow computer unit
Flowmeter Temperature sensor
Pressure transmitter
Components Used
Vortex or swirl flowmeter
Transmitter for absolute pressure
Resistance thermometer, optionally with integral transmitter
Flow computer unit
65
Measurements in Hazardous Areas
The signals must be fed in intrinsically safe via a transmitter power supply.
Flow computer unit
Transmitter power supply Transmitter power supply Transmitter power supply
Flowmeter Pressure transmitter Temperature sensor
66
2.2 Flowmeters
2.2.1 Flowmeters for Differential Pressure Measurement

In Chapter 1.2.5 the relationship between the pressure drop p due to a restricted pipe
section and the volume flow rate qv is described.
This physical phenomenon is the basis for the differential pressure measurements,
where a differential pressure flow primary in the piping (which must be running full)
causes a pressure difference or differential pressure.
D d d
p
p1
pdyn p1 Pressure before orifice restriction
pbl p2 Pressure in orifice opening
p2 p2, Lowest static pressure
pstat pbl Permanent pressure drop
p2,
Fig. 2-48: Pressure Curve in a Primary Flow Differential Pressure Product (Orifice Plate)
Fig. 2-48 shows the conversion of the energy forms. In the restricted section the kinetic
energy (dynamic pressure pdyn) increases due to the increase in velocity and the pres-
sure energy (static pressure pstat) decreases. The pressure differential results from the
difference between the static pressures upstream and the pressure at or directly down-
stream of the restriction. A partial recovery of the energy occurs downstream of the
restriction due to the reduction in the velocity, but their remains some permanent,
unrecovered pressure drop pbl.
67
The differential pressure measurement method is a universally utilized measuring prin-
ciple for flow measurement. Differential pressure flowmeters can be used for measur-
ing gases and liquids even at extremely high pressures and temperatures. The meters
have been optimized by extensive research activities over decades and the results
published as standards. The primary standard is DIN EN ISO 5167 with whose assis-
tance exact calculations can be made. The following equations for mass and volume
flow rates can be found in these reference documents:
C
q m = ------------------ --- d 2 2 p (2.6)
1 4 4
C 2 p-
q v = ------------------ --- d 2 -------------- (2.7)
1 4 4
C Flow coefficient
Diameter ratio
Expansion factor (for compressible media, only)
d Inside diameter of the orifice plate
p Differential pressure
1 Density of the meas. medium before the orifice at operating temperature
qm Mass flow rate
qv Volume flow rate
The flow coefficient C is a function of the diameter ratio , the Reynolds number Re,
the type of the restriction, the location of the pressure taps and finally the friction due
to pipe roughness. The empirically determined values are presented in curves and ta-
bles. The expansion factor takes into account the changes in the density of gases and
steam due to the pressure reduction in the restriction. Tables and curves are also avail-
able for .
68
Designs of Primary Flow Differential Pressure Products
Various designs are available which can provide the optimal meter for the operating
conditions and requirements of the user. An important consideration is, for example,
the pressure drop, which as a rule should be small, or the length of the straight inlet and
outlet sections, which may be relatively short for Venturi tubes. Certainly costs are also
important considerations.
The following primary flow differential pressure products are included in the standard.
Orifices Orifice with corner taps

Orifice with D and D/2 taps
Orifice with flange taps
Nozzles ISA-1932 nozzle
Long radius nozzle
Venturis Classical Venturi tube
Venturi nozzle
Pressure taps
A
Ring with
annular chamber
and slot
E Orifices with
flange taps
(25.41)mm (25.41)mm
Flow direction
D d d D
D D/2
B
Individual
pressure taps D Orifices with
corner taps
C Orifices with D
and D/2 taps
Fig. 2-49: Orifice Designs
The most cost effective design is the orifice plate. Fig. 2-49 shows corner tap arrange-
ments in (B,D) as individual taps and in (A) using angular chambers. The D and D/2 tap
arrangement is shown in (C). The pressure connections for the flange tap arrangement
(E) with standard 25.4 mm (1") spacing are made by drilling through the flanges. They
are often combined with an annular chamber arrangement (A).
69
Nozzles have lower pressure drops, but require especially precise manufacture. Fig.
2-50 (B) shows an ISA 1932 nozzle and its installation with corner taps (A, lower) and
with an annular chamber (upper). Long radius nozzles (C, D) are available for large and
small diameters. Their installation is shown in (A).
H H H
7d
D/2
D-d
0.6041d
6
Flow D/2 0.6d d 0.6d
d
2d
direction
D
D
d
d
c
3
d
0.6041 d
F
F
Large Small
d> 2D d> 2D
3 3 diameter ratio diameter ratio
0.25 0.8 0.20 0.5
A B C D
Fig. 2-50: Nozzle Designs
Venturi tubes and Venturi nozzles are characterized by small pressure drops. Both are
also available in shortened versions. The fact that the pressure drop is an important
factor in evaluating the various designs is shown by the curves (Fig. 2-52).
Pressure drop means energy loss and increased pumping/compression.
70
7 to 15 Truncated D Untruncated
diffuser D diffuser
d< 23D d d> 23D
d
Flow direction
Diffuser E
Flow direction
L
L
0.3d 0.45d
R3
0.4d-
6
Cylindrical d
d
(0.60.02)d
throat C R2
a
Sections 0.3041d
Inlet cone B
21 1 D
R1 1.5d
D
Cylindrical inlet A
D
Fig. 2-51: Classical Venturi Tube and Venturi Nozzle
Comparing the range of possible installations shown in Tab. 2-3, it is apparent that or-
ifices are universal, but have the basic disadvantage of high pressure drop. It is impor-
tant that the edges of the orifice remain sharp. This causes the orifice to be sensitive
to contamination and abrasion.
100
Pressure drop [%]
of diff. pressure
1 Orifice
80 2 Nozzle
3 Venturi short
4 Venturi long
60
1
40
2
20
3
4
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Area ratio [m]
Fig. 2-52: Permanent Pressure Drop for Various Differential Pressure Meters
71
Orifices Nozzles Venturis
Corner Flanged D and D/2- ISA Long Venturi Venturi
Pressure Pressure Pressure 1932 Radius Tube Nozzle
Taps Taps Taps
dmin [mm] 12.5 12.5 12.5 15 10 20 50
Dmin [mm] 50 50 50 50 50 50 65
Dmax [mm] 1000 760 760 500 630 1200 500
min 0.23 0.20 0.20 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.32
max 0.80 0.75 0.75 0.8 0.8 0.75 0.78
ReD, min 5 103 2.5 103 2.5 103 2 104 104 2 105 1.5 105
...20 103 ...540 103 ...540 103
ReD, max 108 108 108 107 2 107 106 2 106
Tab. 2-3: Application Limits for Primary Flow Differential Pressure Products
It is easily understandable that meters as thoroughly researched as differential pres-

sure meters can satisfy many special requirements. Therefore for measuring media
containing solids, segmental orifices are utilized in which the measuring zone is restrict-
ed only at the top. Also wedge meters are a good solution for such kind of applications.
For measuring media with high viscosities the quarter cicle nozzle can be used to Rey-
nolds numbers as low as 50. Nozzles with a throat diameter of 0.6 mm can be used to
meter liquid flow rates as low as 2 l/h. These nozzles are together with or without the
differential pressure transmitter in a single assembly available. The table values can be
extrapolated to nominal diameters of 2000 (78") and beyond.
Installation Requirements
Differential pressure meters can be used without problems only under specific flow con-
ditions. Non-uniform velocity profiles after disturbances prevent an axisymmetric veloc-
ity profile from forming in the throat and thereby alter the differential pressure values.
For this reason the primary flow differential pressure product must be installed between
two straight cylindrical pipe sections in which no disturbances or diameter changes may
exist. Along these sections the required velocity profile for metering can form.
Tab. 2-4 lists the recommendations per DIN EN ISO 5167 for the required straight pipe
sections.
72
Orifices, Nozzles, Venturi Nozzles Classical Venturi Tube
Diameter Ratio Diameter Ratio
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 0.3 0.5 0.75
Single 90 elbow 10 14 18 46 0.5 1.5 4.5
or tee
Two or more 90 elbows (34) (36) 48 80 0.5 (8.5) (29.5)1)
in different planes
Diffuser from 0.5 D to D 16 16 22 54
with a length of 1...2 D
Diffuser from 0.75 D to D 1.5 2.5 6.5
with a length of 1 D
Fully opened gate 12 12 14 30 1.5 3.5 5.5
Outlet side 4 6 7 8 4 4 4
1)
This type of disturbance can still have an affect after 40 x D, therefore the values are enclosed in parenthesis.
Tab. 2-4: Required Disturbance Free Straight Sections, Lengths Listed in Multiples of D
A particularly difficult flow condition is swirl, in which the measuring medium

rotates around the axis of the piping, often asymmetrically. Some of the longer lengths
required in Tab. 2-4 above are required because the combination of fittings induces
swirl in the flow, which requires long lengths of piping before it dissipates. The typically-
quoted straight sections are not sufficient by any means for conditioning such a flow
profile. Therefore a flow straightener must be installed. A flow straightener can also be
used to shorten the recommended straight lengths for the other types of disturbances.
Measuring System Setup

The complete flow measurement installation consists of the following elements:
a) Primary flow differential pressure element (the differential pressure source)
b) Fittings for the primary flow differential pressure element and protective devices
c) Pressure piping (impulse line)
d) Connection fittings and valves and/or isolating & equalising manifold for
impulse lines
e) Differential pressure transmitter
f) Condensate chamber (sometimes used in steam flow measurement)
g) Power supply unit for transmitter
73
The arrangement and design of the installation is a function of the application. The min-
imum requirements for each measuring point are pressure lines between the primary
flow differential pressure product and the differential pressure transmitter. Shut-off
valves (b) are installed in both pressure lines after the pressure connections. For pro-
tecting the differential pressure transmitter (e) a valve combination (d) consisting of
three to five valves (often in a single assembly referred to as a 3-valve or 5-valve man-
ifold) is installed before the transmitter. The valves shut off the transmitter and allow
the pressures in each line to be equalised, enabling the transmitter to be zeroed.
a a
e f f
h b b b b
d c c c c
d
c c d
b b
h h
e e
a
For gases For steam For liquids
Fig. 2-53: Differential Pressure Measurement Setup
If the differential pressure measurement system is used for gas measurements, the
transmitter should be installed above the metering point in order to prevent any con-
densate from entering the pressure lines. Conversely, gas bubbles must not enter the
pressure line when liquids are measured. Therefore, in this case the differential pres-
sure sensor should be installed above the metering point. For steam measurements
the condensate chambers (f) are used to maintain the same liquid level in both pres-
sure lines, ensuring that there is no flow reading error caused by a static pressure
offset in one pressure line.
There are a number of meter arrangements for extraordinary installation situations. Iso-
lation chambers, for example, protect the transmitter against aggressive measuring
media.
74
Differential Pressure Transmitter
The differential pressure transmitter has the following tasks:
It should withstand the high static pressure which exists in the piping.
It should be very sensitive, so that it can operate at low differential pressures, which
are often preferred as a high differential pressure usually results in a high pressure
loss.
Its materials should be chemically resistant to aggressive measuring media.
It should convert the differential pressure into an electrical or analog output signal.
It should be able to extract the square root in order to achieve a direct linear output
proportional to the flow rate.
It should be easy to operate and include self monitoring functions.
It should be capable of modern communication including SMART or fieldbus technol-
ogies (PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus).
It should be interference resistant (EMC) and explosion proof or intrinsically safe.
With the Series 2600T, ABB provides transmitters which satisfy all of the above require-
ments.
Output Supply power Test instrument
Lower range value

Span Electronics
t
Write protection
Adapter
Separating diaphragm
pabs sensor
dp sensor
Filling fluid Overload diaphragm
Process connection Measuring cell
Fig. 2-54: Functional Diagram of a Differential Pressure Transmitter
The 266MST transmitter has a modular design and consists of a measuring element
with integral matching electronic and the operator electronics.
75
This transmitter is a multisensor device for measuring differential and absolute pres-
sures. The completely welded measuring cell is a two chamber system with an internal
overload diaphragm and an internal silicone absolute pressure sensor and a silicone
differential pressure sensor. The absolute pressure sensor, to which pressure is ap-
plied on the plus side, only, measures the process pressure and provides the data for
an almost complete compensation of the static pressure effect. The differential pres-
sure sensor is connected to the minus side of the measurement cell by a capillary tube.
The existing differential pressure (dp)/absolute pressure (pabs) is transmitted to the
measuring diaphragm of the silicone differential pressure sensor via a separating dia-
phragm and the filling fluid.
A minimal deflection of the silicone diaphragm changes the output voltage of the mea-
suring system. This pressure proportional output voltage is linearized, temperature
compensated and then converted by the matching electronic and the electronic unit into
an electrical signal 4...20 mA/HART, PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
To prevent damage to the measurement system due to an overload on one side up to

the total nominal pressure, an overload diaphragm is incorporated. For differential pres-
sures within the specified measuring limits the overload diaphragm has no effect on the
measurements. When the limits are exceeded, the overload diaphragm shifts from its
middle position until it contacts the separating diaphragm. In this way the pressure act-
ing on the sensor is limited.
For local operation an operating option is available that consists of two push-buttons for
setting the lower and upper range value and a write protect switch. In conjunction with
the integrated LCD display, the transmitter can be completely configured externally us-
ing the local operator option, independently of the communication protocol select-
ed.The smallest upper range value is 0.5 mbar, the largest 100 bar. The base accuracy
is below 0.04 % of the span setting. The process-wetted parts are selected to be suit-
able for the chemical properties of the measuring medium.
Fig. 2-55: 266MST Differential Pressure Transmitter
76
When using a differential pressure flow measurement system and the density of the
measuring medium changes due to pressure and temperature variations, it is recom-
mended at least for gas and steam measurements to additionally measure the pro-
cess pressure and temperature and then perform a computational compensation. This
will assure a reliable measurement of the mass or standard volume flow rates, even
under varying conditions.
Even such complex challenges, which in the past had to be satisfied by using individual
differential pressure, absolute pressure and temperature transmitters and an additional
computation element, can now be solved using the 267CS or 269CS multivariable
transmitters which directly measure all the variables and also calculate and apply the
corrections required when the state of the measuring medium changes, all in a single
device.
The same measuring cell already described for the 266MST transmitter is used for dif-
ferential pressure and pressure measurement. Only the electronics unit was expanded
to include a measurement of the process temperature using an external temperature
sensor.
The compensation function does not only calculate the density for the current process
conditions. Depending on the differential pressure sensor type, the Reynolds number
and the diameter ratio it determines the flow coefficient, compensates the thermal ex-
pansion of the piping and differential pressure sensor and, for gases, additionally recal-
culates the expansion factor and the real gas factors for the prevailing process condi-
tions. This is in fact a dynamic compensation assuring the highest degree of accuracy.
Fig. 2-56: 269CS Multivariable Transmitter
77
2.2.2 Compact Orifice Flowmeters
To overcome the technical and economic issues involved in correctly creating an ori-
fice-based flow metering installation, the concept of compact orifice flowmeters such as
ABB's OriMaster was created.
These comprise all of the following traditional components fabricated into a single flow-
meter assembly:
Orifice carrier
Pressure taps
3-valve manifold
Differential pressure transmitter (optionally a multivariable transmitter)
Optional integral temperature assembly for gas/steam flow calculations
Fig. 2-57: OriMaster FPD500 Compact Orifice Flowmeters
As a one-piece, factory-assembled flowmeter, OriMaster has a greatly-reduced num-

ber of potential leakage points and takes minimal customer labor to install correctly. It
comes in only two Beta ratios, which greatly simplifies configuration and calculation.
Accuracy is enhanced by OriMaster being easily and precisely centered in the piping
using the supplied tool. After being assembled in factory, OriMaster is subjected to a
pressure test. Due to its integral mount design and the reduced number of potential
leakage points this measuring device offers improved long-term stability.
78
For simple volume measurement OriMaster includes a differential pressure transmitter.
The transmitter has an all-stainless-steel body and is, thus, ideal for difficult applica-
tions. For applications requiring gas/mass flow / steam calculations, OriMaster is sup-
plied with a multivariable transmitter to measure differential pressure and temperature.
With this a single-piece mass flowmeter or flowmeter with volume correction is avail-
able. Either an integral temperature element or a conventional, separate pipe-mounted
sensor is used for temperature measurements.
2.2.3 Wedge Meters for Critical Applications

The operating principle of a wedge meter is simple and easy to understand. As shown
in the illustration below, the wedge meter is equipped with a V-shaped flow restrictor
that reduces the area available to flow. Fluid velocity increases as flow is contracted at
the flow restrictor. The increase in velocity results in an increase in the kinetic energy
of the measuring medium. By the principle of conservation of energy, any increase in
kinetic energy must be accompanied by a corresponding decrease in potential energy
(static pressure). Thus, the measuring medium directly upstream of the flow restrictor
has a greater potential energy (and higher static pressure) than the medium immedi-
ately downstream of the flow restrictor. Pressure taps placed on either side of the
wedge meter will allow the differential pressure that develops as a result of this imbal-
ance in potential energy to be measured. The volume flow rate can then be directly cal-
culated from the measured differential pressure. Some of the pressure loss created by
the flow restriction will be recovered downstream of the wedge meter as kinetic energy
is converted back to potential energy.
High static pressure Low static pressure
Fig. 2-58: Measuring Principle of a Wedge Meter
A wedge meter is a refinement of a segmental orifice. Whereas the segmental orifice

offers a sudden restriction to flow, the wedge meter provides for a gradual restriction.
The latter has various advantages over the segmental orifice design, including immu-
nity to erosion and immunity to build-up by any secondary phase. The immunity to ero-
sion is the result of the slanted upstream face of the flow restrictor, which prevents
damage due to impingement with any undissolved solids in the measuring medium.
79
The opening beneath the restriction is large and allows for easy passage of any sec-
ondary phase. Eddies and back currents created provide a self-scouring action that
keeps the internals clean and free from build-up.
Wedge meters are designed to measure flow accurately in all flow regimes: laminar,
transition and turbulent. Laminar and transition flow regimes, often encountered with
viscous measuring media or low flow rates, may cause other measuring elements to
exhibit significant deviation from the square root relationship between flow rate and
measured differential pressure. The discharge coefficient of a wedge meter remains
highly linear from Reynolds numbers as low as 500 (laminar) to Reynolds numbers in
the millions (turbulent). This has been proven by years of testing on water and air at
facilities such as Alden Laboratories and CEESI (Colorado Experiment Engineering
Station Inc.).
Flow coefficient [K]
Nozzle
Venturi tube
Vortex flowmeter
Wedge meter
Orifice
Electromagnetic flowmeter
100 1,000 10,000 100,000 1,000,000

Reynolds number [Re]
Fig. 2-59: Flow Coefficients of Different Flow Elements
The area restriction in a wedge meter is characterized by the H/D ratio, analogous to
the beta ratio of a concentric orifice plate. The H/D ratio is defined as the height of the
opening below the restriction divided by the internal diameter of the wedge meter. The
H/D ratio can be varied to create a desired differential pressure for any specific flow
rate. This gives the user a good degree of flexibility in selecting a suited wedge meter
for a given application.
80
The user can select the wedge meter that presents the optimum compromise between
initial cost and pressure loss. As shown in the illustration below, the unrecovered pres-
sure loss for a wedge meter varies with the H/D ratio from 30% of the measured differ-
ential pressure to 60%.
Pressure drop [%]

100 1 Blende
1 2 V-Cone Flowmeter
90 3 Wedge element
80 4 Venturi tube
2
70
60
50
40
3
30
20
4
10
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9

Beta ratio
Fig. 2-60: Pressure Loss as a Function of H/D Ratio
Wedge meters are easy to install and do not require any special tools or training. Since
wedge meter performance is highly insensitive to piping effects there is no need for es-
pecially long straight inlet sections or flow straighteners upstream of the wedge meter.
The normal piping recommendation is to use inlet sections of 5 x D to 10 x D and outlet
sections of 3 x D to 5 x D. Moreover, the wedge meter does not require any strainers
or filters in the inlet section, even if the measuring medium is not perfectly clean. Mea-
suring media with undissolved solids and/or unabsorbed gas, gases with solids and/or
liquids, and saturated, superheated or wet steam can all be metered without any prob-
lems. The choice of a remote seal wedge meter or integral pipe tap wedge meter de-
pends on the amount of secondary phase present.
Typical applications for wedge meters, in addition to those previously mentioned, in-
clude:
Liquids with low electrical conductivity
Viscous and non-Newtonian liquids
Processes with high operating pressures and/or high operating temperatures
Bi-directional flow measurement
CO2 or water injection to revitalize existing oil and/or natural gas fields
Measuring media prone to agglomeration and gum formation
81
2.2.4 Pitot Flowmeters
Averaging Pitot Tube
An averaging pitot tube is an insertion or fixed probe which spans the process pipe di-
ameter. The outer pitot tube of the probe has a number of pressure sensing ports facing
upstream which are positioned at equal annular points in accordance with a log-linear
distribution.
Differential pressure output connected to a differential pressure transmitter
Low pressure side High pressure side
Torbar head
Torbar fitting
Low pressure chamber
Internal
averaging tube
Outer pitot tube
Fig. 2-61: Schema of an Averaging Pitot Tube
The total pressures developed at each upstream port are the sum of two pressures -
the static pressure and the pressure caused by the impact of the flowing medium.
These pressures are averaged within the probe and the resultant pressure is the high
pressure output component of the probe. The spacing of the ports ensures that the re-
sultant average represents the medium velocity of the measuring medium across the
pipe diameter.
The low pressure component is generated from a single sensing port located on the
downstream side of the probe, measuring the static pressure. The difference between
the two pressures is proportional to the flow rate as follows:
h
Q = k. A. --- 1/2

Q = Volume flow rate
k = Constant
A = Cross-section of the pipe/duct
h = Generated differential pressure
r = Density of the measuring medium
82
TORBAR Averaging Pitot Tube
The TORBAR is an improvement on round sensor designs due to the unique profiled
flats which are positioned around the downstream hole, in order to define the separa-
tion point at which the flow lines separate as the measuring medium passes around the
outer pitot tube. This feature creates a stable pressure area at the downstream pres-
sure sensing hole thereby maintaining a more constant flow coefficient at high flow ve-
locities enabling a very wide range of flow measurement (turn down ratio).
Fig. 2-62:
TORBAR is suitable for gases, liquids and steam. Some of the many typical applica-
tions include water, natural gas, flue gas, nitrogen, combustion gases, ventilation air,
sea water, cooling water, crude oil, saturated and superheated steam. Possible pipe
diameters range from 15 mm up to 8 m. TORBAR averaging pitot tubes are available
in a variety of designs to suit the application.
Series 100
Inline (full bore) meters with weld-prepared ends or threaded or flanged connections
for nominal diameters from DN 15 to DN 50.
Series 300, 400 and 500

Fixed insertion type meters with threaded or flanged connections for nominal diameters
from DN 50 to DN 5000.
83
Series 600, 700 and 800
Withdrawable insertion type meters with threaded or flanged connections for nominal
diameters from DN 50 to DN 5000. Retraction of the probe from the piping can option-
ally utilize an easy-to-operate geared retraction system.
Each series covers a defined range of nominal pipe diameters, static pressures and
differential pressures. A special software is available to simplify the calculation, selec-
tion and specification of the best suited TORBAR flowmeter for the respective applica-
tion.
TORBAR flowmeters have been successfully used on a large variety of flow applica-
tions throughout the world in many different industries. Among these are:
Oil production (onshore, offshore) Water treatment

Oil refining Effluent treatment
Nuclear power Power generation
Food and beverages Building services
Chemical Gas processing
Pharmaceutical HVAC
Water distribution Gas transmission
Applications where TORBAR flowmeters have been used successfully include the flow
measurement of:
Natural gas Solvent laden air

Flue gas Saturated air
Nitrogen gas Saturated steam
Hydrocarbon gas Superheated steam
Methane gas Sea water
Combustion gas Cooling water
Sour gas River water
Exhaust gas Waste water
Coke oven gas Potable water
Carbon dioxide gas Liquid oxygen
Petrol vapor Crude oil
Ventilation air Nitric acid
Compressed air Red wine
Hot air Liquid petroleum gas (LPG)
The versatility of TORBAR flowmeters makes them ideal for flue stack flow rate mea-
surement. The ABB SG 2000 system introduces advanced features. With its secondary
averaging feature, two piece design option, and power purge facility, this flowmeter of-
fers a reliable method for determining the flue gas flow rate.
84
2.2.5 Variable Area Flowmeters
The flowrate of gases and liquids can be determined simply, yet relatively accurately
with variable area flowmeters. The measuring medium flows upward through a vertical
conical tube whose diameter increases in the upward direction. The upward flowing flu-
id lifts a float located in the tube to a height so that the annulus has an area which re-
sults in an equilibrium of the forces acting on the float.
DK
DS
FS
FA
Reading edge
FG
Fig. 2-63: Operating Principle of the Variable Area Flowmeter
Three forces act on the float (Fig. 2-63). Downward the gravitational force FG acts:
FG = Vs s g (2.8)
There are two forces acting in an upward direction.
The buoyancy force FA and the flow resistance force FS:
FA = Vs m g (2.9)
m v 2
F s = c w A s ---------------- (2.10)
2
Vs : Volume of the float
ms : Mass of the float
s : Density of the float
m : Density of the measuring medium
cw: Resistance coefficient
As : Cross-sectional area of the float at the reading edge
v: Flow velocity of the measuring medium
DK : Inside diameter of the cone at the reading point
DS: Diameter of the float at the reading edge
85
At equilibrium or a the float position:
FG = FA + FS (2.11)
The flow rate is:

q v = v A = v --- ( D k 2 D s 2 ) (2.12)
4
The resistance coefficient cw is converted to the flow coefficient:
1-
= ----- (2.13)
cw
is a function of the geometric shape of the meter tube and the float and above all, of
the diameter ratio. also includes the friction effect. This empirically determined value
defines device-specific characteristic curves which are incorporated into the basic cal-
culation.
The general variable area flowmeter equation can be formulated taking into account all
the aforementioned equations.
Volume flow rate:

q v = ------ Ds g ms m 1 m
------ (2.14
m s
Mass flow rate:
qm = Ds g ms m1 m
------ (2.15)
s
The annulus available for the flow changes as a result of the conical form of the meter
tube with the elevation of the float. Thus, the float height provides information regarding
the flow rate. When a glass meter tube is used, the measured value can be read directly
from a scale.
In comparison to the differential pressure flow measuring method there is a physical

analogy which is evident from the similarity of the basic equations. The essential differ-
ence is mechanical, because the flow area remains constant in a differential pressure
flowmeter and the pressure difference varies with flow rate while in the variable area
flowmeter the flow area varies to suit the flow rate and the pressure difference remains
constant.
86
Float
An important requirement for metering is the exact centering of the float in the meter
tube. Three methods have proved themselves:
1. Through slots on the float head the flowing measuring medium forces the float to ro-
tate and center itself. This principle, however, cannot be used with all float shapes. Ad-
ditionally, there is a considerable dependence on the viscosity of the measuring medi-
um.
Reading edge
Fig. 2-64: Rotating Float
2. The float is guided by three ribs or three flats (ball floats) which differ from the meter
tube cone in that they are parallel to the tube axis. A variety of float shapes are possible.
Even for cloudy opaque measuring media the measuring edge remains visible.
Fig. 2-65: Float Guides with 3 Ribs or 3 Flats
87
3. A guide rod in the middle of the meter tube is used to guide the float. This method is
primarily used for metal tube variable area flowmeters.
Fig. 2-66: Float with Guide Rod
A wide variety of float shapes are available. The weight, shape and materials are adapt-
ed to the individual installations.
A B C D
Fig. 2-67: Examples of Float Shapes
A Ball float
B Viscosity-immune float
C Viscosity-dependent float
D Float for low pressure drop
88
The ball float is the measuring element preferably used for purgemeters. Its weight can
be determined by selecting from a variety of materials. Shape changes are not possi-
ble.
Therefore the flow coefficient is defined. The ball shape is responsible for the viscosity
effect.
Flow rate [qv]
3 3 Viscosity immune
float
2 Float with downward
2 oriented cone
1 Ball float
1
Viscosity []
Fig. 2-68: Viscosity Effects for the Various Float Shapes
Fig. 2-68 illustrates the effect of viscosity on the flow rate indication. The curve for the
ball float (1) stands out in particular because there is no linear region. That means that
every change in viscosity results in indication changes. Remember, that for many fluids
small changes in temperature can result in viscosity changes.
The float with the cone directed downward (Fig. 2-64 and Fig. 2-67c) is used rather in
larger sized variable area flowmeters than in small ones. The linear region of the curve
in Fig. 2-68/2 is relatively small. This confirms the statement made about the rotating
floats. Appreciably more insensitive is the float shape shown in Fig. 2-67b. The corre-
sponding curve in Fig. 2-68/3 has a long linear region. Such a device is unaffected by
relatively large changes in viscosity, however, for the same size meter, 25% less flow
rate can be metered than for the previously described float. The majority of the variable
are flowmeters manufactured by ABB include a viscosity-immune float.
Finally there are the very light floats (Fig. 2-67d) with relatively low pressure drops. This
design requires minimum upstream pressures and is usually preferred for gas flow
measurement.
89
Pressure Drop
The pressure drop occurs primarily at the float because the energy required to produce
the measuring effect is derived from the pressure drop of the flowing measuring medi-
um. On the other hand, the constructional restrictions in the device fitting cause a pres-
sure drop.
The pressure drop at the float is dependent on its largest outside diameter and its
weight and therefore is independent of its elevation in the meter tube, i.e. it is constant.
The pressure drop through the restrictions in the fittings, however, increases as the
square of the increasing flow velocity.
The resultant pressure drop is the reason for the requirement of a minimum upstream
pressure.
Sizing Procedures
There are tables for all variable area flowmeters with measuring range values listed for
water and air flow in which the empirically determined values have already been in-
corporated. Therefore complicated calculations are not necessary. For measuring me-
dia other than water or air only a conversion calculation to the equivalent table values
is required. The following applies to smooth conical (metal tube) or glass tube variable
area flowmeters with three rib guides when measuring liquids:
(s 1 ) 1
q vwater = q v1 -------------------------------- (2.16)
( s1 1 ) 1
qv1 = Volume flow rate of the measuring medium
qm1 = Mass flow rate of the measuring medium
3
s = Float density, usually 8.02 g/cm for stainless steel
s1 = Density of the float material actually used
s1 = Only for special cases
n = Density of the measuring medium
3
1 = Density of water, here = 1 g/cm
s 1
q vwater = q m1 --------------------------------------
- (2.17)
1 1 ( s1 1 )
Similar sizing procedures are available for glass tube meters with three flats and ball
floats.
90
Example:
Measuring medium Ammonia, liquid

Mass flow rate qm 1500 kg/h
Density 0.68 kg/l
Dyn. viscosity 0.23 mPas
Operating pressure 15 bar
Operating temperature 20 C
From equation (2.17):
8.02 1
q vwater = 1500 -----------------------------------------------------
-
0.68 1 ( 8.02 0.68 )
q vwater = 1779 l/h
This water equivalent value is used in the tables for the selected
device to determine the meter size.
It is necessary to calculate the gas density B relative to air before converting to equiv-
alent table values for air:
nAir = 1.293 [kg / m 3 ]
n Tn pn + p
B = --------------- ---------------- --------------- (2.18)
1.293 T n + T pn
n = Density of gas at normal conditions
Tn = 273.15 K
T = [C]
pn = 1.013 bar
p = [bar]
1 = Density of gas at operating conditions
Equation 2.16 can be simplified for gases (s << w; s1 << 1) to:

s 1-
( q v ) n = q v1 ----------------- (2.19)
s1 n
91
Use this equation and the dimensionless ratio to calculate the s for the air table values:
( q v ) nAir = q v1 s B
---------------
- (2.20)
s1
or for the mass flow rate qm:
q m1 s -
( q v ) nAir = --------------- ------------------ (2.21)
1.293 s1 B
Example:
Measuring medium Ammonia, gaseous

Flow rate qm 1500 kg/l
Density n 0.7714 kg/m3
Pressure p 5 bar
Temperature T 100 C
from equations (2.18) and (2.19):

0.7714 273
B = ------------------ ---------- 6.013
--------------- = 2.592
1.293 373 1.013
1500 8.02 - = 720.6 m 3 /h

( q v ) nAir = --------------- ------------------------------
1.293 8.02 2.592
Viscosity Effects
After selection of the flow meter size the viscosity effects should be checked using the
viscosity influence value, VUZ:
s w
VUZ = ----------------------------------------- 1 1 -
- = ------------------------------ (2.22)
( s1 1 ) 1 w ( s1 1 ) 1
= Current viscosity value of the measuring medium.
92
The calculated viscosity influence value must be smaller than the value listed in the flow
rate tables.The flow rates are unaffected by viscosities less than the calculated value
even when the viscosity changes. If the calculated viscosity influence value exceeds
the listed values, then the device must be calibrated using the current viscosity.
Example:
Measuring medium Ammonia

Dyn. viscosity 0.23 m Pas
Density 0.68 kg/l
Float density s = s1 8.02 (stainless steel)
8.02 1
VUZ = 0.23 ------------------------------------------------
- = 0.27
(8.02 0.68) 0.68
In the table a viscosity influence value of 28 is specified; the calculated value is

much smaller.
There is no viscosity effect.
Variable area flowmeters can be selected and exactly calculated in a much simpler way
using the ABB calculation software flow calc.
Device Selection
A typical range of variable are flowmeter products includes a metal tube and a glass
tube line that are used for the most different applications:
Metal tube Glass tube
High pressure and Low-cost

temperature conditions solution
Opaque measuring Visual check
media of measuring
Steam applications medium
High flow rate Extremely low
Current and contact pressure
outputs conditions
HART communication
Clear,
transparent
Digital display measuring
medium
Fig. 2-69: Comparison of Metal Tube and Glass Tube VA Flowmeters
93
Device Description of Purgemeters
Purgemeters are built small and designed for small flow rates with local indication. All
are designed so that the meter tubes can be exchanged and include a needle valve to
set the flow rate. The span is 1:10 or 1:12.5 for scale lengths between 38 and 250 mm.
A ball float is used. The accuracy is a function of the meter tube material and the scale
length.
For water, or equivalently calculated other liquids, the upper range value is between
0.03 l/h and 140 l/h, for air and gases it is between 2.88 and 4330 l/h.
SNAP-IN Purgemaster Series FAG6100

"SNAP-IN" is an elegant method for exchanging meter tubes. The meter tube holder
and seals in the upper fitting are spring loaded so that the meter tube can be pushed
up and pulled out towards the bottom. A polycarbonate protection cap locks the meter
tube in place. An integrated non-return valve prevents reverse flow. A DVGW certificate
has been granted.
FAG6100-32
FAG6100-31 with
differential pressure
regulator
Fig. 2-70: FAG6100 Series
Materials
Housing Stainless steel
Meter tube holder 1.4401 brass
Meter tube Borosilicate glass, Trogamid
Float Glass, sapphire, tantalum, 1.4401, Carboloy
O-rings Buna N, Viton A, ethylene-propylene
Protection cap Polycarbonate
94
Specifications
Type Scale Length Housing Length Meas. Range

(mm) (mm) for Water
10A6134/44 38 120 3...48 cm3/h
to
3...132 l/h
10A6131/41 70 151 24...264 cm3/h
to
10...105 l/h
10A6132/42 130 264 2.6...32 cm3/h
to
11.2...140 l/h
The flow rate value set with a needle valve varies when the pressure changes. A differ-
ential pressure regulator is an available accessory which maintains a constant flow rate
independent of pressure changes.
Ring initiators are used as alarm signalling units.
Principle of Operation
The ring initiator has a bistable operation which engages the relay in the switch ampli-
fier when the ball float reaches the limit value. The relay remains engaged even if the
float continues its travel beyond the limit value. The relay is released as soon as the
float passes back through the limit value in the opposite direction into the acceptable
range. The instantaneous position, either above or below the limit value, is unambigu-
ously indicated. The use in the hazardous area is possible because the ring initiators
used are intrinsically safe sensors with intrinsically safe circuits. Because of the rela-
tively short meter tube length the model 10A6131/41 is only recommended for either a
minimum or a maximum limit value. For both minimum and maximum limit values the
model 10A6132/42 is more suited.
Glass Tube VA Flowmeter Series FAG1190

This rugged and simply designed process meter is the most used model. Flanges, fe-
male pipe threads or for the food industry, the preferred round threads (DIN 11851) pro-
vide connections to the process. Glass tube VA flowmeters are suitable for flow rate
measurements in many industries, e.g. oven manufacture. The standard housing ma-
terial is stainless steel.
The meter tube is sealed and positioned with O-rings to eliminate mechanical stresses.
95
A supplementary protection shield is provided for gas measurements which protects
the meter tube from contact or mechanical damage. This ensures personnel safety. A
DVGW certificate has been granted.
5
7
4 1 Float
2 Meter tube
3 Scale
1 4 Float stop,
3 inlet/outlet
5 Inlet/outlet fittings
6 Housing
2 7 O-rings
4
7
5
Fig. 2-71: Basic Design
Materials
Meter tube Borosilicate glass
Float Glass, sapphire, tantalum, 1.4301, 1.4571, PVDF and others
Fittings PVC, PVDF and others
O-rings Buna N, Viton A, ethylene-propylene
Housing Stainl. steel 1.4301
Connections FAG1190-97: Female thread
FAG1190-98: Flanged connections
FAG1190-87: Threaded pipe connection
96
FAG1190-98 FAG1190-87
FAG1190-97
Fig. 2-72: FAG1190 Series
Specifications:
Upper Range Value Max. Accura-
Housing Meter Tube Scale (Water) (Air) Perm. cy
Size Size Length [l/h] [m3/h] Pressure Class
[bar]
1/4 1/16 100 0.03...1.1 0.003...0.04 38 6
1/4 1/18 130 0.37...10 0.022...0.33 33 1.6
1/4 1/4 130 4.7...132 0.223...4.03 30 1.6
1/2 1/2 250 43...418 1.3...12.3 21 1.6
3/4 3/4 250 144...1300 4.3...38.7 17 1.6
1 1 250 310...2800 9.2...83.0 14 1.6
1 1/2 1 1/2 250 560...4800 17.3...142.5 9 1.6
1 1 250 1420...17000 42.6...510 7 1.6
97
Proximity switches switch the contacts of the
alarm signalling unit, e.g. for minimum and maxi-
mum values. The adjustable inert gas switches
have a bistable operation, i.e., once activated, the
self holding contact will only be released by the
float moving in the opposite direction.
Fig. 2-73: 55AX1000 Alarm Signalling Unit
Metal Tube VA Flowmeter

The all metal armored variable area flowmeter can be used more universally than the
glass tube meter. The operating pressure can be as high as 250 bar and the maximum
allowable measuring medium temperature (dependent on the ambient temperature) is
400 C.
The transmission of the float position to the indicator is accomplished by a magnetic

coupling system consisting of a permanent magnet located in or on the float and a per-
manent magnet follower on the indicator axis. The follower system does not lose its
coupling even when the float takes a sudden jump due to a flow rate change. The guide
rod of the float remains within the meter pipe even for extreme float excursions.
1 1 Meter tube
2 Scale
2 3 Float
4 Magnet follower
5 Float magnet
3
N
N
S
4
N
5
S
Fig. 2-74: Basic Design of a Metal Tube VA Flowmeter
98
Metal Tube VA Flowmeter Series FAM540
Besides the standard local flow indicators, this metal pipe flowmeter can also be
equipped with plug-in units for one or two alarm signalling units, electrical transmitters
with 4...20 mA output and an additional digital display for local indication of the current
flow rate and totalized flow values. These units can be retrofitted without interrupting
the process. After correct selection of the suited material for the process-wetted parts,
even chemically aggressive (and cloudy) liquids, gases or vapors can be measured. In
combination with the application proven multi-function float this flowmeter opens new
application horizons for this traditional flow measurement technology.
An appropriate damping system prevents compression oscillations in gas and steam

measurements. A double jacket is available to heat the meter tube with steam or hot
water when heat is required for difficult applications.
Materials
Meter tube 1.4404 or PTFE liner
Float 1.4571, Hastelloy C, PTFE
Flanges 1.4404
Indicator housing Aluminium
Measuring Ranges
Upper Range Value

Nominal Diameter Length Water Air
DN inch [mm] [m3/h] [m3/h]
15 1/2 250 0.03...0.85 0.1...25
25 1 250 0.28...6.1 8.4...180
50 2 250 4.2...24 125...720
80 3 250 7...54 210...1550
100 4 250 25...120 760...3600
Specifications
Scale length 100 mm
Max. possible temperature 400 C (for ambient temperature 50 C)
Accuracy class 1.6
Contact output 1 or 2 limit contacts using proximity switches
Analog output 4...20 mA; supply voltage 14...28 V DC
intrinsically safe supply ATEX/IECEx II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4
non-intrinsically safe supply ATEX/IECEx II 1/2G Ex d IIC T6
Communication HART protocol
99
Electrical Transmitter
All metal tube flowmeters with transmitters are designed so that the mechanical indica-
tor will continue to operate even if the transmitter should fail. This means that the mea-
sured value can always be read at the meter location even if the transmission of the
electrical signals has been interrupted.
The transmitter is a two-wire device. It allows to access and change all measuring pa-
rameters if required.
The transmitter monitors itself and includes automatic error diagnostics. Three pro-
gramming switches are accessible when the cover is removed. It is also possible to
configure the transmitter through magnetic pen operation without opening the cover. A
high-contrast two-line LCD display is provided for viewing the measured values and pa-
rameters.
FAM541 FAM544 FAM545 FAM546

Standard design Hygienic design PTFE-lined Heat jacket design
For universal For food and bever- For aggres- For temperature-
application age/pharmaceutical sive media sensitive processes
applications
Fig. 2-75: Metal Tube VA Flowmeter Series FAM540
100
Armored Purgemeter Series FAM3200
This small variable area flowmeter in an all-metal design allows to readily measure the
flow rate of gases and liquids under extreme conditions. Cloudy liquids, which are com-
mon in the chemical, petrochemical and pharmaceutical industries, present no prob-
lems to this flowmeter.
Even in the laboratory, for gas analyzers and wherever the prevailing conditions ex-
clude the use of a glass tube meter, the advantages of the small armored purgemeter
come to the fore.
Materials
Medium-wetted parts 1.4571, PVDF
O-rings Viton A, Buna N
Indicator housing Aluminium, stainless steel
Cap Polycarbonate, Trogamid, stainless steel with glass window
Specifications
Min. meas. range 0.1...1.0 l/h water
0.008...0.048 m3/h air
Max. meas. range 300...3000 l/h water
8...90 m3/h air
Scale length 60 mm
Max. perm. pressure 100 bar
Max. perm. temperature 150 C
Accuracy class 6
Analog output 4...20 mA
Contact output 1 or 2 limit values using proximity switches
FAM3200-25
FAM3200-20
FAM3200-25
Fig. 2-76: Design Types Section View
101
2.2.6 Electromagnetic Flowmeters
If an electrical conductor is moved in a magnetic field which is perpendicular to the di-
rection of motion and to the conductor, an electrical voltage is induced in the conductor
whose magnitude is proportional to the magnetic field strength and the velocity of the
movement. This characterization of the laws of induction also applies to the movement
of a conductive liquid in a pipe through a magnetic field.
Magnet coil
y
z
Meter tube in
electrode plane
v
B
D
Measuring electrode E
x
UE
Measuring voltage
Fig. 2-77: Operating Principle of an Electromagnetic Flowmeter
For the resulting electromagnetic flowmeter the following equation applies:
Uo BvD (2.23)
with the induction B, the flow velocity v and the conductor length (pipe diameter) D.
The flow rate qv through the cross section A under consideration is

D2
q v = A v = ---------- v (2.24)
4
Combining the two equations results in the defining relationship for the measuring sys-
tem:
Uo q v
102
To utilize the principle shown in Fig. 2-77 requires that a magnetic field exist within the
pipe and that the induced voltages can be measured without any interference. Two
coils generate the magnetic field that extends through the pipe only if it is not shunted
by permeable pipe materials. Austenitic steel does not hinder the magnetic field; there-
fore it is the most commonly used material for the meter pipe in the electromagnetic
flowmeter. To prevent shorting out of the measuring signal UE the meter tube must be
provided with an insulating internal lining. The measuring voltage UE is measured by
means of two metallic electrodes that are in electrical contact with the measuring me-
dium.
An additional requirement for the operation has already been mentioned, namely the
fact that the measuring medium must be an electrical conductor. Therefore a minimum
conductivity between 20 and 0.05 S/cm is required, depending on the device type.
Structure of the Magnetic Field

The measuring voltage UE measured at the electrodes is the sum of all the elemental
voltages induced in the entire area of the magnetic field within the meter tube. The fol-
lowing consideration ignores the three dimensional nature of the field and is limited to
the cross sectional area in the plane of the electrodes. It turns out that the magnitude
of the elemental voltages at the electrodes, i.e. the ratio of the partial voltage due to
each element to the total measuring voltage UE at the electrodes is a function of the
geometric location of that element.
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.0
3.0 1.5 1.2 1.2 1.5 3.0
0.9
Electrode
0.6
0.5
Fig. 2-78: Weighting Factor Distribution in the Electrode Plane
103
Fig. 2-78 shows the distribution of the weighting factor of the elemental voltages based
on an assumed value of 1 at the center. It is obvious that the elemental voltages in-
duced in the vicinity of the electrodes have a greater effect than those induced in the
regions near the poles. The weighting factor W concept is used to define the location
related magnitude. In a homogeneous magnetic field, in which the field strength B is
the same throughout, the elemental voltages measured at their sources are all the
same when the flow velocity of the measuring medium is constant throughout.
For a nonsymmetrical flow profile, for example after an elbow (Fig. 1-7a), the various
regions in the metering pipe cross section have differing velocity values. Some areas
are overevaluated and others are underevaluated; as a result , the total measuring volt-
age UE is no longer the average of all the elemental voltages and no longer represents
the flow rate.
With a magnetic field design in which the field strength is inversely proportional to the
weighting factor a method of compensation was discovered. The magnetic field
strength is increased in the low weighting factor areas and conversely decreased in the
high weighting factor areas, so that the product of the weighting factor W and the field
strength B is constant over the entire cross section under consideration:
W B = constant (2.25)
Now the magnitude of all the elemental voltages is the same and a nonsymmetrical flow
profile causes no error.
The practical implementation of a weighting factor inverse magnetic field can only be
approached in practical designs. This fact is the basis for the recommendation that
short inlet sections, 3 to 5 times the pipe diameter in length, be installed upstream of
the electromagnetic flowmeter. This length is sufficient to effectively eliminate the ef-
fects of upstream flow disturbances.
Noise Voltages
The measuring voltage UE is smaller than 0.5 mV per 1 m/s of flow velocity. The mag-
nitude of the noise voltages superimposed on the signal voltage may sometimes be ap-
preciably larger. The connected transmitter has the function to reject the influences of
the noise signals and to convert and amplify the measurement signal so that other con-
nected evaluation units such as indicators, recorders, or controllers can be operated.
What noise voltages exist?

First there is an electrochemical direct voltage. It occurs in a galvanic system at the in-
terface between the electron conductive metal electrodes and the ion conductive liquid.
These "polarization voltages" are a function of a variety of ambient conditions such as
temperature, pressure and composition of the measuring medium. Their values are not
reproducible and are different at each electrode so that their effects can not be predict-
ed.
104
The magnetic coils are capacitively coupled to the signal lines and to the electrodes in-
side the flowmeter sensor. This coupled capacitive noise voltage is a function of the
excitation voltage and of the internal impedance of the measuring section and is there-
fore also a function of the conductivity of the measuring medium. Careful shielding
measures, especially when the conductivity is low, can prevent stray capacitance influ-
ences.
The signal lines in the device are the connection elements coming from the electrodes
and are brought together at the top of the metering pipe and together with the measur-
ing medium form a single turn loop in which the excitation circuit induces a transformer
voltage.
Precise mechanical assembly and orderly placement of the lines minimize this voltage.
Liquid filled flowmeters, particularly in the larger sizes, are good conductors of ground
currents from a nonsymmetrical electrical distribution system.
Fig. 2-79: Conductive Loop in a Transformer
The voltage differential existing between the electrodes due to these currents induces
an additional external noise voltage, which can be prevented by shunting the ground
current around the meter. This can be achieved through a parallel connected low resis-
tance grounded conductor (large copper wire).
To reduce the noise voltages various means are employed which are a function of the
different types of magnetic field excitation to prevent either their generation or their ef-
fects. Direct current voltages, e.g. polarization voltages, can be blocked by capacitively
coupling to the transmitter.
105
Methods of Magnetic Field Excitation
The geometric design of the magnetic field has already been described. How do the
time relationships affect the noise voltages?
Simplest would be to use permanent magnets for the field generation. All alternating
current induced noise voltages would be eliminated. Unfortunately the polarization volt-
ages, whose magnitude cannot be predicted, would be so large that they would swamp
the measuring signal. Is a 50 Hz alternating current excitation the answer? This system
must cope with the noise voltages generated by the alternating current field, but there
are still reasons for its existence.
A magnetic field excitation means which combines the advantages of both of the afore-
mentioned systems and reduces their disadvantages is the pulsed DC field.
Pulsed DC Field
At time t0 a DC voltage is applied to the magnetic coils. Because of the inductance of
the coils the excitation current I increases slowly to its final value.
M1 M2
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4
US U
U
UStr
U50Hz
Fig. 2-80: Magnetic Field with Pulsed DC Excitation
106
After the decay of the transients which occur as a result of the excitation reversal the
excitation current I and the magnetic flux remain constant so that the time differential
of the flux is zero:
d
-------- = 0
dt
The transformer noise disappears and to a great extent the capacitive noise also.
Only when this condition has been reached after 60 ms, is the transmitter turned on at
time t1 and during the next 20 ms time interval measures the electrode signal Us 20 ms
is one period of a 50 Hz system (for other frequencies there are corresponding time in-
tervals).The 50 Hz noise signals, which are primarily due to external influences, are au-
tomatically eliminated.
The electrode signal Us includes the desired measuring voltage U and the remaining
uncompensated noise Unoise. During the measurement interval M1 the following applies:
U s1 = U + U noise (2.26a)
This value is stored.
At t2 the polarity of the DC voltage is reversed and therefore also the measuring voltage
U. The polarity of Unoise does not reverse so that during the measurement interval M2
the following applies:
U s2 = -U + U noise (2.26b)
The transmitter subtracts this value from the value of the previous measurement inter-
val:
U + U noise ( -U + U noise ) = 2U (2.26c)
The result is a measuring voltage U proportional to the volume flow rate; it is free of
noise signals. This is called a system with automatic zero adjustment since at 6 1/4 Hz
its value is calculated six and one quarter times a second.
A higher accuracy can be achieved because of the stable zero even at measuring me-
dium conductivities at the lower limit of 5 S/cm.
107
AC Magnetic Field
The pulsed DC field has some limitations when a fast measurement is required and the
160 ms measurement cycle is too long.
An example is the filling technology in which extremely short measurement intervals

are coupled with exact valve closure characteristics. Another application is the mea-
surement of two-phase media, i.e. the hydraulic transport of solids like, for example,
paper pulp or dredged material. With direct current excitation these measuring media
generate a noise voltage that is superimposed on the measuring signal and results in
errors. These noise voltages do not occur with alternating current excitation.
The field excitation is provided directly from the mains voltage (e.g. 50 or 60 Hz) or from
a driver circuit in the transmitter. Due to the high inductance of the magnetic coils, the
magnetic flux lags to the excitation current I by almost 90.
The measuring voltage U is in phase with , i.e. it is a sinusoidal voltage at mains fre-
quency whose amplitude is proportional to the flow rate. The various noise voltages are
fed together with the signal voltages to the connected transmitter which must sort them
out accordingly.
The DC noise voltages (polarization voltages) are capacitively decoupled. The AC

noise voltages (transformer and capacitive voltages) are not in phase with the measur-
ing voltage U. Their effects are automatically compensated using phase selective cir-
cuits.
Unfortunately, the amplitude or phase of the external AC noise voltages cannot be pre-
dicted. All components that are not in phase with the measuring voltage U are automat-
ically compensated. Only the in-phase component affects the measuring signal, result-
ing in an unstable zero. This noise component is eliminated by static compensation of
the measured values that exist at zero flow.
The zero adjustment can be automated when a defined zero flow occurs during the
measurement. This is, for example, the case in filling processes. When the closed shut-
off valve signals a stand-still, the transmitter receives the command for zero correc-
tion. AC field excitation allows for a minimum conductivity of the measuring medium
down to 20 S/cm. This conductivity limit can be reduced to 0.5 S/cm with an imped-
ance converter. Continued development of this technology has resulted in a driver cir-
cuit which will provide an excitation current at a frequency considerably higher than the
normal line frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. Using this technology, mains frequency induced
noise components can be automatically compensated and the zero stability is almost
as accurate as when a pulsed DC excitation is used.
108
Signal Measurement
The discussions up to this point all assumed that the electrodes were galvanically con-
nected to the measuring medium. This is the normal case. There are, however, special
installation conditions where this is unsatisfactory, for example, extremely low conduc-
tivities or measuring media where deposits form an insulating coating in the flowmeter.
This coating interrupts the signal circuit.
A smooth flow passage is formed by the outer surface of the standard electrode togeth-
er with the inner surface of the liner. A degree of self cleaning for readily removable de-
posits can be achieved with pointed electrodes which extend into the higher velocity
regions of the flow. For difficult applications, e.g. for thick grease layers, a mechanical
cleaning through a clean out flange or a removal of the meter from the line is necessary.
This relatively large effort seldom assures satisfactory long term operation. It can only
be achieved by using capacitive signal measurement.
+ +
- -
Galvanic Capacitive
Fig. 2-81: Signal Measurement
Two metallic area electrodes are located behind the meter liner. They form two capac-
itors together with the process-wetted inner wall whose dielectric is the liner.
The signal generation occurs as previously described with a pulsed DC or an AC mag-

netic field. The generated voltage charges the capacitors so that on the outer side a
proportional flow signal can be measured. Since the capacitance must be at least
20 pF, minimum area dimension limits exist which cannot be met by electromagnetic
flowmeters with a nominal diameter below DN 25.
Shielding electrodes between the measuring electrode and the meter tube prevent a
capacitive loss to the outside. The Driven-Shield technique eliminates the capacitance
between the signal line and the shield. The signal voltage amplitude is coupled back to
the shield so that the voltage differential between the conductor and the shield is zero.
The minimum conductivity which can be measured with capacitive electrodes is

0.05 S/cm.
109
Flowmeter Sensor
The electromagnetic flowmeter consists of a sensor and a transmitter. Determining fac-
tors for the selection of the appropriate sensor are its material and the type of process
connection. Inside the meter tube, the tube liner and the electrodes are in contact with
the measuring medium. As a result, they must be made of materials that are chemically
resistant to the measuring medium which, in some cases, may be extremely aggres-
sive. The most commonly used liner materials are hard rubber, soft rubber, PTFE, PFA
and ceramics; common electrode materials are stainless steel 1.4571, 1.4539, Hastel-
loy, tantalum and platinum.
C D
B E
Fig. 2-82: Sensor Types for Electromagnetic Flowmeters
A+B Wafer type design

C Threaded pipe connection conforming to DIN 11851
D Sanitary design
E Flange design
A housing, meter tube and pipe connections form the exterior of the sensor. Here also
the specific installation conditions, i.e. the ambient conditions, determine the material
selection. For technical reasons and to ensure the appropriate physical properties the
meter tube must be made of austenitic, i.e. stainless, steel. The pipe connections are
generally steel or stainless steel while the housing is usually either painted cast alumi-
num or stainless steel.
110
Wafer Type Design Variable Process Connection Design
Welded spud Male thread
Threaded pipe connection Tri-Clamp
Fixed clamp
Fig. 2-83: Stainless Steel Sensor with Vacuum-Tight PFA Liner and Variable Process
Connection
Magnetic Field Stabilization

According to equation (2.23) the signal voltage U0 is proportional to three variables: the
magnetic induction B, the diameter D and the flow velocity v. A direct proportionality to
only one of the variables requires that the other two be constant. This means, if the volt-
age U0 is to be proportional only to the flow velocity v, then the magnetic induction B
and the diameter D must remain constant. While D, as a mechanical value, is constant,
the magnetic induction B changes as a function of the excitation current I. The latter is
maintained constant by monitoring a voltage URef generated in the sensor/transmitter.
As a rule, electromagnetic flowmeters are flow calibrated, usually at an ambient tem-

perature of approximately 20 C. If the device is later used at other temperatures, the
ohmic resistance of the coils changes and with it the excitation current I and the mag-
netic induction B, resulting in a changed signal voltage U0.
The excitation voltage, which influences the current, is line related and can also vary.
111
These effects can be prevented through utilization of constant current devices, a costly
solution. A more elegant procedure is the compensation circuit.
U0
R URef
Fig. 2-84: Generation of a Compensation Voltage
Across a resistor R in the excitation circuit, a voltage drop URef occurs which is propor-
tional to the excitation current I and therefore the magnetic inductance B. The voltage
U0 is also proportional to the induction B. When the ratio of these two variables U0/URef
is calculated, the influence of the magnetic induction B is canceled. From the basic
equations (2.23) and (2.24):
qv --A- U
= D -----0 (2.27)
B
and replacing B by URef:
U0
q v = K ----------- (2.28)
U Ref
This equation with K as the calibration factor forms the basis for the calibration of the
electromagnetic flowmeters from ABB. For devices with pulsed DC excitation, the cal-
ibration factor K is replaced by the calibration factors CZ/Sz (zero) and CS/Ss (span) for
each excitation frequency. These values are stored in a memory module (EEPROM/
FRAM) together with additional parameters, e.g. the nominal diameter, measuring
range, pulse value and selected inputs and outputs.
The transmitter used continuously operates with these values and thereby controls the
excitation current and the reference voltage. Thus the continuous monitoring of these
values assures that the excitation current remains under control. Since the calibration
values and parameter settings are stored digitally in an EEPROM/FRAM or Sen-
sorMemory, it is possible to exchange a transmitter for each an every sensor. The
same transmitter electronics can be used universally for all nominal diameter ranges.
112
Transmitter
The task of the transmitter is to amplify the relatively small measuring voltages, free
them from noise voltages and convert them to usable signals and indicate their values
or provide them for further processing.
Fig. 2-85: Platform Concept, Universal Transmitters and Sensors
Different transmitter designs in conjunction with the sensor satisfy the specific require-
ments for a particular electromagnetic flow measurement system.
113
Transmitter FSM4000
This transmitter belongs to the AC field excited flowmeters with increased excitation
frequency. Therefore after start-up a zero adjustment is rarely required. The measuring
system has a system accuracy of 0.5 % of rate, similar to a pulsed DC device. The
sensors incorporate expanded diagnostic functions with which the user can obtain ad-
ditional information for a possible upcoming measurement system verification require-
ment. Communication using HART, PROFIBUS PA and FOUNDATION Fieldbus is
possible.
Mounting the Transmitter

Based on the requirements of the user the arrangement of the electromagnetic flow
measurement systems may vary. The different designs of the flowmeter sensor have
already been described earlier in this publication. The transmitter variants are defined
by the appropriate housing arrangements. There are two distinctly different mounting
options: the remote mount design and the integral mount design.
Fig. 2-86: Remote-Mount Designs with Transmitter in a Wall Mount Housing
114
Transmitter ProcessMaster / HygienicMaster
The transmitter is provided with a local flow indicator and totalizer. The device is oper-
ated using the TTG (Through The Glass) technology with non-contact capacitive but-
tons. The local LCD display can be easily rotated as required to ensure readability in
all mounting positions. The parameters related to the measuring point are automatically
monitored and possible errors reported. In its basic version the transmitter provides a
configurable current output (4...20 mA) and a pulse output (optoelectronic coupler, pas-
sive or active), switch inputs and outputs and an empty pipe detection function. The
measured error is 0.4 % of rate. The communication is either via HART, PROFIBUS
PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
The integral mount design of the ProcessMaster or HygienicMaster unites the transmit-
ter and sensor in a single housing in which local operating or display possibilities are
available. The big advantage of this variant is the elimination of the interconnection ca-
bling.
Fig. 2-87: ProcessMaster Fig. 2-88: HygienicMaster

Integral Mount Design Integral Mount Design
115
Online Diagnostic Functions Improve the Availability
In order to better support plant operators in error analysis, ProcessMaster and Hygien-
icMaster are provided with a diagnostics package that indicates both process-related
and device-related faults. The classification of the diagnostic notices is in accordance
with Namur Recommendation NE107 (VDI/VDE Directive 2650). The four specified
symbols represent the following status signals:
Symbol Status Signal Examples for Detail Information

Failure Device-related failure cause
Process-related failure cause
Function check Configuration change

Local operation
Specify substitute value
Out of specification Device is operated out of specified range.
Unsecure through ambient or process effects
Maintenance required Maintenance now required

Maintenance soon required
Plain text messages provide detailed information about possible errors. Process errors
like gas bubbles, empty pipes, partially filled pipes, electrode corrosion or electrode de-
posits are recognized. Moreover, the diagnostic tool delivers direct suggestions (in-
structions of action) to remedy the malfunction. All information can be read directly on
site from the device's LCD display.
This data can also be uploaded into process control systems via HART or fieldbus com-
munication and then processed using a Plant Access Management or Maintenance
Software.
116
Verification of Built-In Devices
ScanMaster is a DTM-based verification tool for checking the functionality and integrity
of the transmitters and sensors of built-in ProcessMaster or HygienicMaster flowme-
ters. Gradual changes like electrode deposits are logged by ProcessMaster or
HygienicMaster 500 as trend data and can be read out and represented graphically by
ScanMaster. The tool provides any easy method for cyclic verification of all measured
values and of the functional reliability of the installed devices.The determined test and
verification results are stored in a database and can be retrieved and printed as re-
quired.
Fig. 2-89: SanMaster FZC500 Diagnostic and Verification Software
117
FXL5000 (Miniflow) For Simple Flow Measurements
The electromagnetic flowmeter FXL5000 (Miniflow) is an alternative to the flowmeters
described so far. It has been designed specifically for simple flow measurements which
have no special requirements.
The nominal diameter range extends from DN 10 ( threaded connections) up to

DN 50 (2 threaded connections). The transmitter is mounted directly on the flowmeter
sensor. The complete unit is very compact, has low weight and can be quickly installed
in the piping using the threaded connections. The electrical connection is realized by
using connector plugs. In addition to the two-line LCD display, which indicates the cur-
rent flow rate and the total flow value, the device incorporates a flow rate proportional
20 mA output and a pulse output. The flowmeter can be configured using the clear text
display in conjunction with the foil keypad.
Fig. 2-90: FXL5000 (Miniflow)
118
FES7000 (Fill-MAG) For Filling and Dosing Applications
Exact filling and dosing with high reproducibility often presents difficulties in conjunction
with small but also with very large containers. These problems have been addressed
and solved by ABB with an electromagnetic flowmeter based solution: FES7000 (Fill-
MAG) and FXF2000 (COPA-XF).
Depending on the individual application requirements (measuring medium, fill and dos-
ing time, boundary conditions, etc.) it is also possible to use mass, vortex and swirl
flowmeters for batch processes. The control technology for mass flowmeters offers the
same comfort as an FES7000 system (for more detailed information about these de-
vices see the corresponding device descriptions).
The FES7000 provides a very compact and intelligent electromagnetic flowmeter sys-
tem whose major features are a fast response time and specialized software adapted
to batch and fill processes coupled with an ability to CIP/SIP clean the abrasion resis-
tant sensor. This specialized software allows for filling and dosing processes with mea-
surement periods 500 ms and assures a reproducibility of 0.2 % of rate. In a fill sys-
tem the automatic measurement and correction of the second stage flow, which is a
function of the valve characteristics, is of great importance. Good and reproducible
measurement results can only be achieved with systems such as the FES7000, which
can compensate for these effects and is suitable for a variety of diverse boundary con-
ditions.
Flowmeter Technology
The FES7000 is a system with remote mount design. The transmitter is available as a
19" plug-in unit and in a field housing. The process connection options for the stainless
steel flowmeter sensor include all the usual commercially available connections. Cus-
tomer-specific design variants are also possible.
The FES7000 system operates with defined input and output contacts (Fig. 2-91). Four
different fill and preset volumes can be set directly at the transmitter or selected by an
external fill volume selector switch or from a PC, PLC or distributed control system.
The fill cycle is initiated by a start signal which opens the valve. After the anticipatory
or end contact volumes have been reached the transmitter directly controls the fill
valve. Up to 32 transmitters can be connected using the RS 485 interface and config-
ured via an operator station, PLC or transmitter dialog unit. The connection of additional
components such as control loops, control elements (weigh scale) as well as printers
is possible.
119
Product line
Control system
Operator station
RS 232 / SPS
RS 485
RS 485 Printer
Dosing
valve Con-
troller
Containers Start Stop / Selection

Emergency of fill quantity
stop
Fig. 2-91: Schematic of a Fill System with Supervisory Recipe Control

And Integration in a Distributed Control System
Special features of the FES7000 system include:

Suitable for fast as well as continuous fill and batch processes from the smallest
amounts to large containers.
Nominal diameters from DN 1 to DN 100.
Accurate, reproducible fill cycles reducing the amount of safety overfill quantities.
Monitoring the adherence to the user programmable overfill and underfill limits after
each fill operation.
Automatic emergency shutoff if the maximum fill time is exceeded or an error is de-
tected by the system monitor in the transmitter.
120
Single and Two Stage Fill Cycles
To achieve a high degree of reproducibility of the fill or dosing cycles, in addition to the
flowmeter, components such as valves, good level and pressure control as well as the
system concept are of critical importance.
One of the most important factors is the quality of the fill valve (fast response time, re-
producible closing characteristics). The second stage flow occurs during the closing cy-
cle of the valve based on the valve closing time. This flow quantity is measured by the
flowmeter and a correction made by a specially developed algorithm in the transmitter
to assure that the desired fill quantity has been reached when the valve, whose closing
cycle is initiated by an end contact signal from the transmitter, is finally closed.
The second stage flow measurement is used to adjust the end contact activation for the
following fill cycle. In this manner continuously changing second stage quantities are
recognized and automatically corrected in comparison to fill systems which use a pre-
set totalizer value to correct for the second stage flow. The control of the second stage
flow is ultimately decisive for the reproducibility of the fills. Use of an anticipatory con-
tact (two stage fill cycle, Fig. 2-92) which reduces the flowrate prior to the valve closure
decreases the second stage quantity and thereby increases the reproducibility. A pre-
requisite is a very similar fill curve, which is a function of the valve, the upstream pres-
sure, the system concept and lastly of the product itself.
t7
t1 = Fill time at max.
Selection of fill quantity flow rate (anticipatory
t6 contact quantity)
Start t2 = Fill time (end contact)
t1 t3 = Fine dosing, t2...t1
t3
Antic. contact t4 = Measure second
t2 stage flow,
End contact t4 t5 programmable, 0...2 s
t5 = Automatic zero adjust,
max. 1 s, can be
interrupted by start.
Q
t6 = Start of filling cycle,

tmin 20 ms
t7 = Fill quantity selection
tmin 2 ms before start
Flow rate signal
t
Fig. 2-92: Two Stage Fill Cycle
For very short fill and dosing times (approx. 3. seconds) it is recommended that the
valve be controlled directly by the end contact (single stage fill cycle, Fig. 2-93).
Anticipatory and end contacts are user programmable.
121
t5 t1 = Fill time at max.
flow rate
Selection of fill quantity (end contact quantity)
t4
t2 = Measured second
Start stage flow,
t1 programmable, 0...2 s
t2 t3
End contact t3 = Automatic zero adjust,
max. 1 s, can be
interrupted by start.
Q t4 = Start of filling cycle,

tmin 20 ms
t5 = Fill quantity selection

Flow rate tmin 2 ms before start
t signal
Fig. 2-93: Single Stage Fill Cycle
Official Calibration
The measuring system has been approved by the PTB (Physikalisch-Technische
Bundesanstalt, the German National Institute of Technology) for official calibration. Ap-
provals for a variety of measuring media have been granted. Specialized application
areas for this electromagnetic flowmeter type are KEG-filling (of reusable barrels), as
well as the measurement of chemical products. Regular recording of the process fill cy-
cles, centralized data acquisition and recording parameter settings for a certification re-
port are possible. Depending on the printer protocol selected, various data sets can be
printed and used for statistical analysis.
The above-described FES7000 system offers a number of possibilities for automating

a wide variety of processes. Fast amortization of the investments by reducing the actual
fill quantity due to a reduction of the safety overfills and thereby the product cost, im-
provement of the product quality, increase in productivity and profit optimization plus
reduction of the operating, maintenance and service costs.
Electromagnetic flowmeters additionally provide convincing advantages over the exist-

ing mechanical fill and dosing systems using fill pistons or pumps, intermediate or prefill
containers, rotary vane or turbine flowmeters and weighing systems.
122
Advantages include:
Wear-free system requiring low maintenance.
CIP/SIP capability of the flowmeter reducing the cleaning and sterilization time.
Shortest fill times for a variety of fill quantities possible because of the wide range
span.
Higher product output through optimal utilization of the system, because suction
phase and tare determination required by mechanical systems are eliminated.
Communication possible with the measurement system including integrated statisti-
cal functions.
FXF2000 (COPA-XF) For Simple Filling and Dosing Applications

This flowmeter with integral mount design is an all stainless steel device. Due its small
dimensions it is ideal for cluster mounting in round and series filling machines.It is also
suitable for continuous flow measurement, when only a pulse or current output is re-
quired and display is not required for indication. The reproducibility of the device is
0.2 % of rate for fill cycles longer than 2...4 seconds.
The flowmeter is available with nominal diameters from DN 3 to DN 100. All the usual
commercial process connections are available. Customer-specific connection variants
are also possible. For harsh operating conditions the FXF2000 includes an instrument
air connection for creating a protective air stream. The device is also available in a trop-
icalized design with coated circuit boards.
The FXF2000 incorporates three different operating modes. In addition to the Batch
operating mode for fill and dosing processes with a function as flow rate proportional
sensor and a pulse output, the Conti operating mode for continuous measurement
with an additional 0/4...20 mA current output is available. The Filler operating mode
includes the function as a stand-alone fill system and is mainly based on the FES7000
technology described above.
As the FXF2000 basic functions just include a pure flowmeter functionality with fre-
quency or current output and a standardized pulse output, additional hardware and
software are required for realizing fill and dosing processes. Value-loaded pulses must
be totalized and processed using a presetting counter, PC, PLC or DCS.
123
Fill quantity preselection, utilization of single or two stage fill system, start/stop function,
second stage flow measurement and correction, control and/or monitoring functions as
well as valve actuation are all functions which must be carried out by other evaluation
electronics connected to the flow rate sensor. These electronics or software have a tre-
mendous effect on the quality of a fill and dosing system and the reproducibility of the
fill processes. Fig. 2-96 shows a schematic of such a filling system.
Fig. 2-94: Flowmeter FXF2000 Fig. 2-95: Flowmeter FXF2000 (COPA-XF)

(COPA-XF) with Integral Mount Design and
Communication Capabilities
Decisive for the development of such a device were the market demands for an eco-
nomical, small and effective compact electromagnetic flowmeter in an integral mount
stainless steel design for multivalve fillers with up to 168 fill valves.
Due the impressive number of fill valves per system and the possibility to develop and
configure the required software in-house, this system concept became interesting from
technical and economic viewpoints.
One time developed software together with know-how can be transferred to many other
systems. Each system type can utilize the economical standard flowmeters, but is pro-
vided with individually adapted software with different user interfaces and system-spe-
cific components.
124
Since central computers already exist for other control tasks of the fill machine, they
can also be used for the signal processing, fill quantity presetting and required correc-
tions as well as the valve control functions.
PC, PLC, DCS, presetting

counter for signal processing
and higher level control
Supply
reservoir
Instrument air connection
Pulse/
synchronous output Flowmeter
24 V DC
power supply
Container
Fig. 2-96: Schematic of a Fill System with the Electromagnetic Flowmeter

FXF2000 (COPA-XF)
125
Communication Capabilities
For the configuration and control of the device two possibilities are available. If the de-
vice requires service, a transmitter control unit with display can be plugged on.
If parameter changes for the process or information about the present status of the pro-
cess is required the RS 485 interface can be used.
The ASCII Protocol allows for communication with a distributed control system, a pro-
grammable logic controller or a PC with the required individual software. The connec-
tion is made using a separate communication plug.
A complete solution including the monitoring of the flowmeter and parameter setting
without the need to open the housing is provided by a dialog unit with integral display.
This new generation of volumetric operating fill machines with electromagnetic flow
measurements instead of fill systems with intermediate or preset fill containers (limita-
tions for fluid varieties and fill time) or weigh systems, takes advantage of the many
benefits which an electromagnetic flow measurement system offers. The CIP/SIP-
cleanability, wear free and low maintenance technology, viscosity insensitivity coupled
with the wide span of the electromagnetic flowmeter with a simple and fast change over
to other fill quantities results in quality improvements, product savings by reducing
overfills, productivity improvement and cost reductions.
126
Sizing of Electromagnetic Flowmeters
The user provides the nominal diameter of the flowmeter sensor and the existing pip-
ing. A check calculation using the current flow rate should however be made which
should indicate the same size. Otherwise, the piping size must be adjusted.
l/min m3/h l/s l/min m 3 /h l/s
5 3 8 2
4 3 5
2 6
3 5 4
4 2
2 5 3
2 3 10
10
8 8
2 2
6
103 6 10 6
8 5 8 5
0
4
80 10
6 10 4 4
DN DN
5 3 6 10
8
4 5 3 8
2 6
65
3 4
5 6
DN
2
4
00 00 00 00 00
3 5
12 14 16 18 20
2
3
DN DN DN D DN
50
10 4
DN
8 2
N
2 10
4 3
102
40
6
DN
8 5 8
2
32
4 5
6 1 10 6
DN
5 3 8 5
8
0
4
0 00 50 00 00 00 00 00 00
6 4 3
8 9 1
15 20 25
2 6 10
DN D D DN
3 5
DN DN DN
4 5 3 8
N N
2 4
1 3 6
2
7
8 3 5
2
10 6 4
35 4 N 4 N 5 N 6
8 5 2
D
10
4 3 3
DN
-1 10
6 10
D
5 3 8 8
8
2
DN
4
6 4
DN D D
2 10 6
6
3 5
N
DN
8 5
4
2 4
0
2
30
10-1 3 6 10
DN
8 5 3 8
0
25
4
2
DN
4
DN
1 6 6
5 2
8 3 5
0
4
20
-2
3
6 10 4
DN
DN
5 3 8 2
4 2 3
6 10
0
2
15
2
3 5 8
DN
DN
4 2
5
3
12
2 10 6
10-2 3
DN
5
1.
8 5
DN
8
2 4
10-1 6 6 10
1
5 5 3
DN
8 8
4
6 10-3 4
6
5 3 8 2
3 5
4
2 6 4
3 5
2
4 3
2 10
10-3 3
0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10

0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10
m/s m/s
Fig. 2-97: Flow Rates as a Function of the Nominal Diameter
127
The basis for the calculation is the flow velocity as a standard size independent of the
nominal diameter.
A few examples from actual situations (the values refer to upper range value):
Slurries, pulps, pastes 0.5...1 m/s
Liquid food stuff 1...2 m/s
Liquids in chemical processes 1...3 m/s
Potable water 3...6 m/s
Water to transport solids up to 15 m/s
Using the nomograph Fig. 2-97 the desired flowmeter size can be determined. When
the values in the nomograph are used to determine the pipe size, differences between
the calculated value and the actual pipe diameter may exist. This is due to the differing
liner thicknesses and is compensated for during the calibration.
Occasionally, differences exist between the calculated pipe size and the nominal diam-
eter of the flowmeter, with the size of the electromagnetic flowmeter usually the smaller.
A transition using conical sections is possible when cone angles are less than 8.
Flanged reducer
8
D
Fig. 2-98: Reduction at the Measuring Point
128
The pressure drop resulting from the 8 reduction can be calculated using the nomo-
graph Fig. 2-99. For this the diameter ratio d/D must be calculated and the curve for the
current flow velocity v selected from the family of curves. The pressure drop p can be
read at the intersection between these two values.
Pressure drop p [mbar]

100
v=8m/s
7m/s
6m/s
5m/s
10
4m/s
3m/s
2m/s
1m/s
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9

Diameter ratio d/D
Fig. 2-99: Pressure Drop with Pipe Restriction
129
Specifications
Signal Measurement Galvanic
Magn. Field Excit. With Pulsed DC Excitation
Model ProcessMaster FEP300/500 FXF2000 (COPA-XF)
HygienicMaster FEH300/500
Liner material DN PN DN PN
Hard rubber 15...2000 10...100 Cl150...Cl600
Soft rubber 50...2000 10...40 CL150/CL300
Ceramic carbide 25...1000 10...40 CL150/CL300
PTFE 10...600 10...40 CL150/CL300
ETFE 25...1000 10...40 CL150/CL300
PFA 3...200 10...40 CL150/CL300 3...100 10...40
Peek 1...2 10
Electrode material Stainl. steel 1.4571 or 1.4539, Hastelloy C4 or B2, titanium, tantalum,
platinum-iridium
Excitation frequency 6 1/4 Hz, 12 1/2 Hz or 25 Hz 12.5/25 Hz
Min. conductivity 5 S/cm 5 S/cm
Max. poss. pressure rat- PN 100/Cl600 and higher PN 40/Cl300
ing
Max. poss. temperature 180 C 130 C (150 C)
Electrode design Standard electrode, pointed electrode
Process connection Flange DN 3...2000 Wafer Des. DN 3...100
Wafer design DN 3...100 Weld st. DN 3...100
Welded spud DN 3...100 Thr. pipe conn. DN 3...100
Threaded pipe conn. DN 3...100 Tri-Clamp DN 3...100
Tri-Clamp DN 3...100 Fixed clamp DN 10...40
Male thread DN 3...25 Male thread DN 3...25
1/8 sanitary conn. DN 1...2
Upper range value 0.5...20 m/s 0.5...10 m/s
Max. meas. FEP300/FEH300: 0.4 % of rate 0.5...10 m/s
error opt. 0.2 % of rate 0.5 % of rate
FEP500/FEH500: 0.3 % of rate Reproducibility
opt. 0.2 % of rate 0.2 % of rate
Current output 4...20 mA, 4...12...20 mA selectable 0...5 mA, 0/2...10 mA,
0/4...20 mA,
0...10...20 mA,
4...12...20 mA
selectable
Load 0...600 0...600
Pulse output Passive, active Passive, active
Pulse width Selectable from 0.1 ms...2000 ms Selectable from 0.1
ms...2000 ms
Supply power Switch-mode power supply
85...253 V AC 16.8...31.2 V DC
16.8...26.4 V AC
16.8...31.2 V DC
Tab. 2-5: Overview of Flowmeter Sensor and Transmitter Designs
130
Magn. Field Excit. With Pulsed DC Excitation
Model ProcessMaster FEP300/500 FXF2000 (COPA-XF)
HygienicMaster FEH300/500
Autom. empty yes DN 10 (TFE DN 25) yes DN 10
pipe detection
Max./min. alarm yes Operating modes
2 meas. ranges yes (FEP500/FEH500) Continuous
Batch
Presetting totalizer yes (FEP500/FEH500) Filler
Expanded yes (FEP500/FEH500)
diagnostic functions Electrode deposit detection
Gas bubble detection
Conductivity monitoring
Sensor temperature monitoring
Trend analysis
Tab. 2-6: Continued: Overview of Flowmeter Sensor and Transmitter Designs
131
Specifications
Magn. Field Excit. With AC Field Excitation
Model FES7000 (Fill-MAG) FSM4000
Liner material DN PN DN PN
Hard rubber 15...2000 10...100 Cl150...Cl600
Soft rubber 50...2000 10...40 Cl150/Cl300
Ceramic carbide 25...1000 10...40 CL150/CL300
ETFE 10...600 10...40 Cl150/Cl300
PTFE 25...1000 10...40 CL150/CL300
PFA 3...100 10...40 Cl150/Cl300 3...200 10...40 CL150/CL300
Peek 1...2 10 1...2 10
Torlon 1...2 10 1...2 10
Electrode material Stainl. steel 1.4571 or 1.4539, Hastelloy C4 or B2, titanium,
tantalum, platinum-iridium
Excitation frequency 50/60 Hz AC 50/60/70 Hz AC
Min. conductivity 20 S/cm, optional: 5 S/cm or 0.5 S/cm
Max. poss. pressure PN 40 PN 100/Cl600 and higher
rating
Max. poss. temperature 130 C (150 C) 180 C
Electrode design Standard electrode, pointed Standard electrode, pointed electrode
electrode Swedish design
Process connection Wafer design DN 3...100 Flange DN 3...1000
Welded spud DN 3...100 Wafer design DN 3...100
Thr. pipe conn. DN 3...100 Welded spud DN 3...100
Tri-Clamp DN 3...100 Threaded pipe conn. DN 3...100
Fixed clamp DN 10...40 Tri-Clamp DN 3...100
Male thread DN 3...25 Male thread DN 3...25
1/8 sanitary conn. DN 1...2
Upper range value 0.5...10 m/s 0.5...10 m/s
Max. meas. 1 % of rate 0.5 % of rate
error Reproducibility Reproducibility
0.2 % of rate 0.2 % of rate
Current output 0/4...20 mA; 0/2...10 mA
Load 0...600
Pulse output Passive (10 kHz) Active, passive
Supply power 24, 115, 230 V AC Switch-mode power supply
50/60 Hz 85...253 V AC
16.8...26.4 V AC
16.8...31.2 V DC
Autom. empty yes DN 10 (except for impedance converter)
pipe detection
Max./min. alarm no yes
Tab. 2-7: Overview of Flowmeter Sensor and Transmitter Designs
132
WaterMaster For Water Applications
WaterMaster provides the flexibility to solve your most demanding water applications,
enabling previously unattainable operational and financial benefits. WaterMaster is the
ultimate solution for flow measurement and management in sectors as diverse as wa-
ter, wastewater, sewage and effluent. Innovative and versatile attributes allow to
achieve interoperability within a wide range of asset management systems. WaterMas-
ter delivers speed, simplicity and ease of use.
Advanced Sensor Design

The WaterMaster range is available in sizes DN 10 to DN 2400 (3/8 to 94 inch). An
innovative octagonal sensor design improves the flow profile and reduces upstream
and downstream piping requirements for the most commonly installed sizes DN 40 to
DN 200. Flowmeters with traditional sensor designs are used for sizes over DN 2000.
Using a higher excitation frequency combined with advanced filtering, WaterMaster im-
proves measurement accuracy by reducing liquid and electrode noise.
Submersible and Buriable Installation Options

All WaterMaster sensors have a rugged, robust construction to ensure a long, mainte-
nance-free life under the most difficult conditions experienced in the water and waste
water industries. The sensors are, as standard, inherently submersible (IP68, NEMA
6P), thus ensuring suitability for installation in chambers and metering pits which are
liable to flooding. A unique feature of the WaterMaster sensors (DN 500 to DN 2400)
is that they are buriable. Installation merely involves excavating to the underground
pipe, fitting the sensor, cabling to the transmitter and then backfilling the hole.
Fig. 2-100: Electromagnetic Flowmeter WaterMaster
133
Custody Transfer
WaterMaster has an MID/OIML R49 Approval for Accuracy Classes 1 and 2 for pipings
with any mounting position and bidirectional flow. A water meter with MID approval is
suitable for billing applications. It provides a high measuring accuracy and reliable mea-
sured values.
Self-Calibration
A unique self-calibration concept developed by ABB (patent pending) has been imple-
mented in WaterMaster. Compliance with OIML R49 Type P (Permanent) checking re-
quirements requires that electromagnetic flowmeters have 'Checking Facilities', where
a simulated signal is fed into the input of the flow transmitter and the output is compared
and checked within predetermined limits. ABB's WaterMaster has taken this to the next
level. It uses this signal to not only check the accuracy, but also to perform automatic
calibration. This not only meets and exceeds the OIML R49 requirements, it also
means the device has the following features:
Self-calibrating device.
No factory calibration necessary.
Calibration adjustment is continuous during normal running.
Exceptional long-term stability.
Very low temperature coefficient.
Measurement accuracy depends on one precision resistor only.
Adjustment % displayed to user for diagnostic use.
Alarm limits to trap hardware failures and out-of-range adjustments
VeriMaster Insitu Verification Software

WaterMaster can be expanded with the VeriMaster software for insitu verfication. Ver-
iMaster is a PC application. When the PC is coupled to the WaterMaster through the
infrared service port, it generates a report on the accuracy of the complete flowmeter,
both sensor and transmitter. This technology builds on over 10 years of ABBs experi-
ence in the field of insitu verification, through its leading CalMaster range. VeriMaster
is a quick and easy to use utility, that uses the advanced self-calibration and diagnostic
capability of WaterMaster, coupled with fingerprinting technology. This allows to deter-
mine the accuracy status of the WaterMaster flowmeter to within +/-1 % of its original
factory calibration. VeriMaster also supports printing of calibration verification records
for regulatory compliance.
134
VeriMaster integrates with WaterMaster seamlessly, meaning:
No interruption to any of the wiring.
No cover removal, with operation through the front glass using the infrared service
port.
No interruption to the measurement.
If desired, an operator can additionally check and record the accuracy of the current
and pulse outputs.
Improved Results through Digital Signal Processing

Digital Signal Processing (DSP) gives improved performance and enables real time
measurements for maximum reliability. DSP allows the transmitter to separate the real
signal from the noise, thereby providing high quality outputs especially in harsh envi-
ronments involving vibration, hydraulic noise and temperature fluctuation.
Speed, Ease and Security in the Field

Data storage in the WaterMaster using the SensorMemory principle eliminates the
need to match sensor and transmitter in the field. On initial installation, the self-config-
uration sequence automatically replicates into the transmitter all calibration factors,
nominal diameter and serial numbers as well as customer site specific settings. This
eliminates the opportunity for errors and leads to increased speed of start-up. Redun-
dant storage of data in both the sensor and transmitter memory is continually updated
during all operations to ensure total integrity of the measurement. The on-board Sen-
sorMemory eliminates the possible problems associated with pluggable data memory
modules. Easy access to wiring also minimizes the time for problem solving in the field.
Detailed Diagnostics for Rapid Decision Making

WaterMaster is proven to be robust and reliable, with unmatched diagnostic capabili-
ties providing the right information to keep the process up and running. In accordance
with NAMUR NE107, alarms and warnings are classified as maintenance required,
function check, failure and outside of specification.
135
AquaProbe The Insertion Flowmeter
AquaProbe insertion flowmeters are used for clean water flow measurement. Compat-
ible with ABBs AquaMaster 3 and WaterMaster transmitters, the latest generation
AquaProbe opens up new possibilities for both temporary and permanent installations.
Supply options like battery, solar or wind power also makes AquaProbe ideal for use in
challenging locations.
AquaProbe can be fitted without interruption to the flow, even when the piping is under
pressure. Contrary to full-bore electromagnetic flowmeters, the AquaProbe's magnetic
field does not reside in the entire pipe cross-section. The flow velocity is only measured
at a representative point of the pipe section and then the flow rate is calculated from
this in the transmitter. The accuracy of 2 % of rate is also assured for low flows. With
this, AquaProbe is also suited for leakage monitoring in drinking water networks.
The connector on the sensor permits to connect a pressure transmitter to the

AquaProbe, to provide pressure measurement capabilities in addition to flow measure-
ment. In drinking water networks these two measured values (pressure and flow rate)
allow to draw conclusions regarding the degree of incrustations/deposits in the piping.
This is especially important for fire extinguishing pipe systems where incrustations or
deposits may affect the water throughput and, thus, cause danger in the event of a fire.
Fig. 2-101: AquaProbe system for permanent or temporary installations
136
2.2.7 Ultrasonic Flowmeters
The sound velocity c which is a material property value is the propagation velocity of
a sound wave in a medium. It changes with the density of the measuring medium.
Therefore it is temperature dependent in liquids and pressure and temperature depen-
dent in gases. When a sound impulse is transmitted from location A it arrives at a sec-
ond location B with the velocity of sound at time:
t = --l-
c
The time changes when the sound carrier is also in motion, in fact, it is the sum of the
sound velocity in the measuring medium and the measuring medium velocity. This ef-
fect is utilized in an ultrasonic flowmeter.
There are two basic methods for ultrasonic flow measurements:

1. Transit time method
2. Doppler method
Transit Time Method
v
A B
l
Fig. 2-102: Sound Path in a Liquid Flow
A sound impulse transmitted from a fixed point A travels with a velocity c + v and arrives
at point B after a time interval t1:
l -
t 1 = ----------- (2.29a)
c+v
The time required for an impulse to travel from B to A is t2:

l -
t 2 = ----------- (2.29b)
cv
Since the measurement of t2 is made immediately after t1 it is assumed that during this
time interval the sound velocity c in the fluid is constant. Then from
c = ---l- v c = ---l- + v
t1 t2
137
the flow velocity in the measuring medium can be extracted using
v = --- ---
l 1 1
- ---- (2.30)
2 t 1 t 2
This measurement value is independent of the sound velocity, the pressure, the tem-
perature and the density of the measuring medium.
In a practical meter design a sound impulse is sent diagonally across the meter tube.
Then the flow velocity of the measuring medium becomes
v = --------------------- ---- ----

l 1 1
2 cos t 1 t 2
Fig. 2-103: Schematic of Transit Time: R = Receiver, T = Transmitter
An essential requirement for the transit time measurement is the acoustic transparency
of the measuring medium. There should be few solid particles or gas bubbles in the
measuring medium.
Doppler Method
For ultrasonic flow rate measurements using the Doppler effect there must be inhomo-
geneities or impurities (dispersers) in the measuring medium so that a portion of the
sound energy can be reflected.
Fig. 2-104: Schematic of the Doppler Principle
138
The sound wave with a transmitter frequency f1 impinges on a particle in the measuring
medium (solid particle or gas bubble) and is reflected. Therefore every particle acts as
a moving transmitter with the transmitter frequency f1. The frequency shift f of the re-
flected signal received is a function of the flow and sound velocities:
v
= 2 0 cos ( ) ---
c
Since the sound velocity is a function of the temperature, pressure and composition of
the measuring medium, even small changes in these variables affect the Doppler shift
and an appropriate compensation must be provided. The solution is to include a de-
fined inlet section for the ultrasound, e.g. a sound path made of resin, in which a Piezo
transmitter is cast.
Applying the refractive equation of Snellius

cos ( ) = -----------------
cos ( -)
------------------
c cv
from which
v
= 2 0 cos ( ) ---
c
and therefore
cv
v = ------------------------------------ = constant
2 0 cos ( )
The factor cv /cos () can be determined. The Doppler shift is therefore essentially in-
dependent of the sound velocity in the measuring medium. Only sound velocity chang-
es in the acoustic inlet section change the Doppler frequency. This change can be de-
termined beforehand and compensated.
Limitations of Ultrasonic Flow Measurement

For the ultrasonic flow measurement the flow velocity is measured within the narrow
band of the sound beam. The calculated flow rate through the entire pipe cross-section
is only valid for axissymmetric flow profiles. In order to assure that these conditions ex-
ist, inlet sections with a length of up to 15 x D and outlet sections of up to 10 x D are
required. It is possible to reduce the effects of nonsymmetrical flow by using two or
more sound beams for additional profile samples.
139
Installation
Ultrasonic flowmeters are available in two variants. There are inline systems and
clamp-on systems. In the inline design the ultrasonic transducers are mounted rigidly
in the pipe wall and are directly or indirectly in contact with the measuring medium.
These measuring systems can be calibrated and achieve a measuring accuracy of
0.5 % of rate and better.
Different is the clamp-on technology. The ultrasonic transducers are mounted on the
outside of the piping. The sound pulse must traverse the pipe wall and any coatings
which may be present with differing sound velocities twice. During installation the laws
of refraction and reflection must be considered. Although the determination of the flow
velocity is straightforward, the exact pipe geometry must be known if conversion to a
volume flow information is desired.
These measuring systems can only be dry calibrated and achieve an accuracy better
than 2.0 % of rate. If an on-site calibration can be conducted then accuracies up to
0.5 % of rate are possible.
Specifications
Nominal diameter DN 25...DN 3000
above DN 600 clamp-on systems are preferred.
Flow velocity 1...10 m/s
Measuring accuracy + 0.5 % of rate for inline systems
+ 2.0 % of rate for clamp-on systems
Max. measuring medium -40 C...260 C
temperature with special designs up to 500 C and higher
2.2.8 Coriolis Mass Flowmeters

Measuring Principle
For cost and material balance calculations mass flow information is preferred in tech-
nical processes because it is independent of physical influences when compared to
volume flow information. Pressure, density, temperature and viscosity do not change
the mass. Therefore, the mass flow rate is the favored measuring variable. Mass can
only be measured indirectly, e.g. with the help of Newtons second law which states that
force times acceleration equals mass. When weighing the acceleration is due to gravity
and this law is applicable.
How can the mass of a liquid be determined using this relationship? One must accel-
erate the liquid in a rotating system and measure the inertia effects. A physical effect
named after the French mathematician Coriolis is utilized.
140
B
R
A
r
Fig. 2-105: Rotating Disk
A mass m is located at point A at an average distance r from the center on a rotating

disk with an angular velocity which is to be moved radially towards B at a radius R,
that is to a location with a higher torque and a higher energy content.
If no energy is added to the system the mass will not arrive at point B or a different vari-
able is changed, namely . The inertia force which opposes the change is the Coriolis
force Fc:
F c = 2 m ( v ) (2.35)
v is the velocity of the mass on the way from A to B. These principles are transferred
to a liquid filled pipe.
Measuring principle: When a mass flows through a vibrating pipe Coriolis forces exist
which bend or twist the pipe. These very small meter tube distortions are measured by
optimally located sensors and evaluated electronically. Since the measured phase shift
between the sensor signals is proportional to the mass flow rate, the mass flow rate
through the Coriolis mass flowmeter can be determined directly.
This measuring principle is independent of density, temperature, viscosity, pressure

and conductivity. The meter tubes always vibrate at resonance. The resonant frequen-
cy which exists is a function of the meter tube geometry, the material properties and
the mass of the measuring medium vibrating in the meter tube. It provides exact infor-
mation about the density of the medium to be measured. In summary, it can be stated
that the Coriolis mass flowmeter can be used to simultaneously measure the mass flow
rate, density and temperature of a measuring medium.
141
Movement of the pipes inward
no flow
Movement of the pipes outward

no flow
Direction of the Coriolis force with flow and movement

of the pipes inward
Direction of the Coriolis force with flow and movement

of the pipes outward
Fig. 2-106: Simplified Presentation of the Coriolis Force
Advantages of this Measurement Method:

Universal measuring system for flow rate, density and temperature, independent of
conductivity
inlet and outlet sections
flow profile
density and, thus, pressure and temperature of the measuring medium
Direct mass flow measurement
Very high measuring accuracy (typically 0.15 % of rate)
Multi-variable measuring principle, simultaneous measurement of
mass flow rate
volume flow rate
density
temperature
No moving parts, therefore wear free
142
Disadvantages of this Measurement Method:
Relatively high initial cost (for an accuracy of 0.15 % of rate)
Installation limitations for multi-phase measuring media or high gas content
Deposits or abrasion can lead to errors, especially in the density measurement
Limited material selections for process wetted parts, corrosion resistance must be
checked
Twin Tube Measuring System

The overwhelming majority of Coriolis instruments today are based on the twin tube
principle with a flow splitter and two bent meter tubes. The advantage of this design,
e.g. the CoriolisMaster-MC2 from ABB, is temperature stability and in particular, the de-
coupling of the meter pipe vibrations from external vibrations. The amplitudes of the vi-
brations which are required for determining the phase shift, are measured between the
two meter tubes and not relative to the housing. Possible vibrations of the housing
therefore have no effect on the measurements.
Based on the appreciably more stable and defined signals this system provides the
most accurate measurements coupled with insensitivity to outside influences. A well-
designed twin tube meter requires minimum energy to start and keep the system reso-
nating and generates measurement signals even for the smallest flow rates. The twin
tube design is used in approximately 80 to 90 % of present applications.
Fig. 2-107: Bent Single Tube Design Fig. 2-108: Twin Tube Design
143
Single Tube Measuring System
Besides the twin tube design there is also the single tube design, e.g. the ABB flowme-
ter CoriolisMaster-MS2. In order to maintain the insensitivity to external vibrations, the
meter tubes in this design are bent into loops. The amplitudes of the vibrations, and
thereby the phase shift, are measured between the tube loops and not relative to the
housing. This principle offers distinct advantages for the smaller size meters because
a flow splitter in not required.
The straight single pipe design has advantages in that it can be more easily cleaned,
has a reduced pressure drop and is less harsh on the measuring medium. However,
these advantages come with a lower accuracy and a higher sensitivity to external vi-
brations. Because of the straight meter tube, the amplitude differences must be mea-
sured relative to the housing. If the housing is also vibrating, the effects are difficult to
compensate. Moreover, the measured signals are appreciable smaller which also con-
tributes to the reduced accuracy mentioned earlier, especially for the density measure-
ment.
It is difficult to start and keep a single straight tube resonating. The elasticity of a pipe
is directly related to its wall thickness. Therefore vibrating straight tubes must be con-
structed thin and are available only for limited nominal diameters. For abrasive or cor-
rosive measuring media, however, the thin wall sections of the meter tube can add ad-
ditional safety concerns.
Application Areas
Based on the advantages mentioned above it is not difficult to understand that this Co-
riolis measurement principle is being preferred by more and more industries over other
measuring principles. Of particular interest is the direct mass measurement, because
many recipes or processes are based on the mass of the used materials. Previous de-
pendence on density variations and therefore temperature or pressure changes are
concerns of the past. If in the past a volume measurement had to be converted to mass,
the Coriolis technology allows to skip this step.
Since this principle is independent of the properties of the measuring medium, such as
conductivity, flow profile, density, viscosity, etc., almost all materials can be measured:
e.g. oils and fuels, cleaning agents and solvents, fats, silicone oil, alcohol, methane,
fruit mixtures, starch, dyes, biozide, vinegar, catsup, mayonnaise, beer, milk, sugar so-
lution, gases, liquefied gases, etc.
As a result of the simultaneous measurement of the density and temperature of the

measuring medium, a real time quality analysis of the medium can be made. If the den-
sity of the measuring medium changes from the set point value, quality problems in the
process are identified. Also the presence of air inclusions or similar effects can be mon-
itored from the density signal.
144
In the food and beverage industry a decisive factor is the good cleanability of the instru-
ments, even of a twin tube system, as the EHEDG-certified flowmeter sensor design
from ABB has demonstrated. Furthermore the highly accurate mass and density mea-
surements of the materials are a great advantage. Compositions can thus be monitored
online. The concentrations of two phase measuring media can be determined from the
density measurement using special software. Thus for the sugar concentration in a li-
quid the BRIX is readily available. Up to 3 different density-concentration curves can
be entered in the transmitter of the CoriolisMaster, so that every type of concentration
can be measured.
In the chemical industry, the high-accuracy mass flow measurement is particularly im-
portant. The variable explosion protection concept (Ex e and i exclusively defined
by the customer's connections) including isolation and, not least, the additional security
of a flameproof enclosure around the meter tubes are also important advantages.
ATEX Approvals up to Group 1 (Zone 0) have been granted. The high reproducibility
(typically 0.1 % of rate) is a great advantage for control or fill processes.
In the petrochemical field the additional material compatibility per NACE and the rug-
ged design are of importance, especially where extreme ambient conditions exist. The
meters are used in oil fields at -50 C or in offshore applications where a highly corro-
sive salt water environment is present. For this last application, ABB offers a special
protective coating for the demanding North Sea applications.
In the paper industry the Coriolis mass flowmeters are predestined for use in the coat-
ing and color kitchens. Problems always occurred due to the varying density of viscos-
ity values; there e.g., the CoriolisMaster measures the mass directly, providing excel-
lent stability and high accuracy. Also, the conversion from volume to mass flow units
has become unnecessary.
Due to the multivariability, flexibility, high accuracy, wear resistance and ruggedness,
the Coriolis mass flow measurement continues to conquer new markets and applica-
tion fields. Although at first it may appear that the initial acquisition costs are higher they
often become negligible when compared to the later savings due to more accurate and
simpler dosing. In contrast to the traditional measuring devices the measuring accuracy
remains constant for a long time period at a minimum maintenance cost.
145
Density and Concentration Measurements
The meter tubes of a Coriolis mass flowmeter vibrate at the corresponding resonant fre-
quency which is a function of the current meter tube weight. When the meter tube
weight changes, the resonant frequency changes as well. As the meter tubes them-
selves usually remain unchanged, it is the weight of the measuring medium in the meter
tube that changes. The meter tube weight and the internal volume are known. As a re-
sult, the density of the measuring medium in the meter tube can be calculated from this.
This means that the current resonant frequency gives the current density of the mea-
suring medium.
fR = (fl) 1 C
f R = ------ -------------------
2 m fl + m t
m fl = V fl
mfl
fR fR = Resonant frequency
mt = Mass of the meter tube
mfl = Mass of the measuring
medium
fl = Density of the measuring
medium
mt C = Constant
Fig. 2-109: Basic Principle of Density Measurement
This principle opens up a variety of possible applications. On one hand, the meter can
be used not only for flow measurement, but also for controlling the quality of the mea-
suring medium. With this, the user can open another window to his process. If, on the
other hand, the measuring medium should remain constant, the density measurement
provides information about the meter reliability, because the frequency characteristics
will change immediately when the meter tube is changed by deposits or abrasion.
But density measurement can do a lot more than this: For compounds of two substanc-
es with different densities the density and temperature measurements of the measuring
medium allow to draw conclusions about the concentration of each substance.
146
This can be realized by using either complex polynominals or, as ABB does, simple ma-
trices as described below:
Temp. Con- Temp1 Temp2 Temp3 ... Temp 10

centration
%1 C1 Density Density Density Density Density
... ::: Density Density Density Density Density
% 10 C10 Density Density Density Density Density
Usually, matrices for standard applications like alcohol in water or sugar in water are
preset.
Phosphoric acid (x %)
Phosphoric acid (70 %)
Qm, o, T, C
PLC
Operator
Qv, o, T station
S
Water
In practice, this allows to achieve considerable savings of time and, thus, resources in
mixing processes or fill processes with simultaneous setting of the mixing ratio. De-
pending on the application, the average fill time can be reduced by approx. 60 %.
147
Frequently Asked Questions and Answers
What must be considered during the installation?
These devices in comparison to the other flowmeters are relatively easy to install. They
can be installed horizontally or vertically. Specific distances from elbows or valves, etc.
are negligible because the measurements are unaffected by flow profile effects. The
devices should be installed right before or after the flanges, but should not be attached
directly to the housing.
What effect do gas or air bubbles in the measuring medium have on the measurement?
First gas bubbles tend to dampen the vibration of the pipes, which is compensated by
a higher excitation current. If the gas content is not too large and has an essentially ho-
mogeneous distribution, the mass flow measurement is hardly affected. The density
measurement however can be impaired. This can be explained by the measurement
method. The resonant frequency of the vibrations is proportional the instantaneously
vibrating mass, consisting of the measuring medium and the meter tubes. Assuming
that the tubes are completely filled, the density can be calculated from the equation:
m = V
If the pipes are not completely filled or contain a gas or air components then an error
will occur.
How do solids affect the measurement?

As long as the solids vibrate exactly the same as the meter tube and thereby add a con-
tribution to the flow rate signal, there are no problems with the measurement. Decisive
is the relationship between the particle size (inertia) and the viscous forces (accelera-
tion forces). The lower the viscosity the smaller the particle size should be. Generally,
a self draining design is preferred, to prevent particles being deposited in the pipe
bends, especially when there is no flow.
What is affected if the back pressure is too low?

When the back pressure is low the fullness of the meter tubes cannot be guaranteed,
and also the danger that cavitation may occur exists when the vapor pressure is less
than the system pressure.
What happens if the meter pipes are not completely filled?

In this case the meter tubes cannot reach a stable vibrating condition and a measure-
ment is no longer possible. This condition can be recognized by an unstable, too low
density signal and also by a large increase in the driver current.
148
Coriolis Mass Flowmeter CoriolisMaster
Fig. 2-110: Twin Tube Measuring System Fig. 2-111: Single Tube Measuring System
CoriolisMaster MC2 CoriolisMaster MS2
The flowmeter sensor of the CoriolisMaster MC2 is characterized by two bent one-
piece meter tubes through which the measuring medium flows in parallel. A twist-proof
and bend-proof structure which joins the inlet and outlet is especially suited for absorb-
ing the external forces and torques. The meter tubes are welded into flow splitters at
the inlet and outlet ends. Thus, there is no direct coupling to the process connections.
This design to a large extent minimizes the effects of external vibrations.
The elimination of welds at the highest stressed locations as well as hard soldering in
a vacuum the pipe, driver and sensors brackets assure long term durability. An excep-
tional long term stability is achieved by thermal treatment of the meter tubes.
Fig. 2-112: CoriolisMaster Certified for the Food and Beverage Industries
149
The optimized design of the flowmeter sensor in conjunction with the meter tube mate-
rial 1.4435/316L allows unrestricted use in hygienic applications. The entire construc-
tion consisting of meter tube, flow splitter and process connection has been tested and
certified per EHEDG. The CIP and SIP processes can be carried out at temperatures
up to 180 C.
The CoriolisMaster transmitter is available in integral or remote mount design and in-
corporates a digital signal processor (DSP) which allows for mass flow rate and density
measurements at the highest precision. An exceptional long term stability and reliability
are the results. Self-diagnosis of the flowmeter sensor and transmitter and absolute
zero stability are additional advantages.
150
2.2.9 Thermal Mass Flowmeters for Gases
The most commonly used flowmeters for gases measure the operating volume flow.
This requires additional measurements of pressure and temperature to calculate the
mass flow rate. These corrective measures add cost and increase the complexity of the
measurements; in addition they decrease the measuring system accuracy. The thermal
mass flow measurement for gases, on the contrary, provides mass flow rate in kg/h di-
rectly without any additional measurements or calculations. Using the normal density
of the gas the normal volume flow rate can be calculated, e.g. in Nm/h.
There are two industrial methods used for thermal gas mass flow rate measurement,
hot film anemometers and calorimetric or capillary meters.
Functionality of a Hot Film Anemometer

This method uses the flow rate dependent heat transfer from a heated body to the mea-
suring medium. In the fields that are relevant for process engineering, this flow rate de-
pendent cooling is not a function of the pressure and temperature, but of the type and
number of particles that get into contact with the hot surface. This means the method
determines the mass flow rate of the measuring medium directly.
Rh: Thin film resistor

heated
RT: Thin film resistor
meas. medium temperature
Rh qm: Mass flow rate
RT Ih: Heating current
Ih
V: Controller circuit
qm
Fig. 2-113: Hot Film Anemometer, Operating Principle
The sensor unit consists of two measurement resistors that are part of an electrical
bridge circuit. One of these resistors assumes the temperature of the flowing gas,
whereas the other resistor is electrically heated and, at the same time, cooled by the
gas mass flow. A control circuit applies heat to the resistor so that a constant temper-
ature difference exists between the resistors. The power P is, thus, a measure of the
gas mass flow rate. With the instrument and gas dependent constants K1...3 this rela-
tionship can be represented by King's equation:
P = T K 1 + K 2 ( qm ) K 3 ) (2.36a)
151
This provides the measured value directly in the units kg/h or standard m3/h. The den-
sity correction of the measured value otherwise required is no longer necessary. The
compact design of the sensor unit assures a minimum pressure drop of typically
1 mbar. For thin film sensors the response time is in the ms range. Vibration insensiti-
vity and an extremely wide span at accuracies up to 1 % of rate are the rule for all ther-
mal mass flowmeters.
Thermal Mass Flowmeter in Digital Technology

For digital devices the measuring principle described above was further developed to
include a gas temperature measurement and appreciably extended diagnostic func-
tions. The measuring range could be expanded to 1:150 due to the improved signal
quality. The separate measurement of the gas temperature can be used to compensate
for the temperature dependence of the gas constants. The diagnostic functions can be
used as a preventative maintenance tool to evaluate the operating time, temperature
spikes and system loads.
Technical Designs
Different device concepts were developed for pneumatic, test bench, machine con-
struction, hygienic and chemical process applications. Their primary difference is the
design of the sensor units, dependent on whether quick response, flexibility or chemical
resistance is required.
Devices for the Process Technology

With the Sensyflow FMT400-VTS and FMT500-IG flowmeters rugged, universal device
models are available for process applications. All models are connected to the process
via special pipe components which ensure a defined, reproducible installation condi-
tion.
Sensyflow FMT400-VTS is a flowmeter with integral mount design which directly
provides a flow rate proportional 0/420 mA signal.
The digital Sensyflow FMT500-IG is available with PROFIBUS DPV1 or analog/
HART communication. It can be delivered with up to 4 characteristic curves for dif-
ferent gases or pipe diameters.
For hygienic applications the Sensyflow FMT400-VTCS series flowmeters can be

used. Special materials and an adapted sensor design make the devices capable of
CIP and SIP.
152
Typical Applications
Gas flow measurements in the chemical and process industries
Compressed air balancing
Gas burner control
Digester gas and aeration measurements in sewage treatment plants
Gas measurements in air separation systems
Hydrogen measurements in processes
Carbonization in breweries and soft drink production
Sensyflow
FMT500-IG,
Sensyflow FMT400-VTS Sensyflow FMT500-IG, integral mount
remote mount design design
Fig. 2-114: Models for the Different Industries
Specifications of the Sensyflow FMT400-VTS and FMT500-IG Series

Diameter From DN 25, also for non-round cross sections
Span up to 1:150
Oper. temp. of the meas. medium -25...300 C
Pressure range 0.5...40 bar absolute
Measuring uncertainty 1 % of rate
Typical pressure drop 1 mbar
Response time 0.5 s
Output signal 0/4...20 mA; pulse; frequency; binary
Communication HART, PROFIBUS DPV1
Supply power 230; 110; 24 V AC; 24 V DC
Materials Stainl. steel; Hastelloy; Ceramic
Explosion protection Zone 0
153
Devices for Flow Rate Test Benches
Test bench applications, e.g. intake air measurements of combustion engines, include
a high accuracy requirement over a wide measuring range. Additionally, a quick re-
sponse is essential. Only then can the dynamic processes be depicted correctly with
sufficient resolution. Sensyflow FMT700-P has been designed specifically for such ap-
plications.
Fig. 2-115: Thermal Mass Flowmeter for Test Benches Sensyflow FMT700-P
Specifications for Sensyflow FMT700-P

Diameter DN 25DN 200
Span 1:40
Oper. temp. of the meas. medium -25...80 C
Pressure range 2.5 bar absolute
Measuring uncertainty 1% of rate
Response time T63 ~ 12 ms
Output signal 0/4...20 mA; 0...10 V; RS 232, ASAM-GDI
Supply power 230/115 V AC
154
Devices for Compressed Air Regulation
In paint robots the ratio of paint to atomization air for color application control must be
controlled with a very fast response time. The Sensyflow FMT200-ECO2 specifically
designed for this application is a compact unit incorporating the complete electronics.
It is also suitable for all compressed air applications to DN 25 as a result of its universal
connection concept.
Fig. 2-116: Thermal Mass Flowmeter for Compressed Air Sensyflow FMT200-ECO2
Specifications of Sensyflow FMT200-ECO2

Diameter to DN 25
Connections Small flange, G 3/8"...1", Legris, Transair
Span 1:100
Oper. temp. of the meas. medium 0...50 C
Pressure range 10 (16) bar absolute
Measuring uncertainty 3 % of rate
Response time T63 ~ 25 ms
Output signal 0/4...20 mA; 0...5/10 V; pulse, digital, frequency, RS 232
Supply power 24 V DC
155
Heating Method
For very small pipe diameters or extremely small flow rates, which primarily exist in the
gas analyses sector and in laboratories, the heating method can be used. The gas
flows through a capillary which is heated with a constant power P.
P
L
qm: Mass flow rate

P: Constant electrical
Measuring
heating power
signal L: Thermal power dissipation
T2
qm T1
Fig. 2-117: Heating Method, Operating Principle
(P L ) C -
q m = --------------------------------
cp (T2 T1)
The mass flow rate can be calculated from the resultant temperature difference, the
heat loss of the system and a device constant C.
Specifications
Diameter to DN 25
Span 1...50
Max. operating temperature of meas. medium 70 C
Max. permissible pressure 100 bar
Measured error < 1 % of rate
Response time 1...5 s
Output signal 0/4...20; 0...10 V; digital
Supply power 24 V DC
Materials Aluminium, stainless steel, plastic
156
2.3 Flow in Open Channels and Free Surface Pipelines
2.3.1 Flow Measurement in Open Channels

Open channels are found extensively in the water and waste water industries. They are
characterized by one surface bounded by the atmosphere. The same is valid for free
surface pipelines which are additionally found in the process industry.
Indirect method using height measurement

h
With measuring weirs
With Venturi flumes

h
Velocity measurement in a free surface pipeline using an electro-

magnetic flowmeter
Flowmeter in a fully filled culvert

h
Flowmeter for partially filled pipes

h
Fig. 2-118: Flow Rate Measurement Methods
157
Measurement Methods
Measuring Weirs
For large water flows and small slopes where the water can be dammed and the flow
stream is completely ventilated measuring overflows are the appropriate measuring
equipment. Ventilation means that air has free access under the overflow so that the
stream will separate and fall freely. Measuring weirs consist of thin wall plates with
sharp metering edges placed perpendicular to the flow direction. Various shapes are
used as a function of the application conditions. For smaller flow rates a V-notch weir
is used.
h
w
Fig. 2-119: Thomson V-Notch Weir
Based on Equation (1.27) the flow through the V-notch weir is:
8
q v = ------ tan --- g h h 5 / 2 (2.37)
15 2
The discharge coefficient is a function of the ratio of the overflow height h to the weir
height w. The value can be determined using a complicated calculation procedure.
Fig. 2-120 shows the values in curve form.
h:w=
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
h [m]
1.00
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
0.05
0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.70

Fig. 2-120: Discharge Coefficient for a V-Notch Weir per Rehbock and Thomson
158
V-notch weirs are suitable for flow rates between 2 and 100 l/s. By paralleling a number
of V-notch weirs a reasonable arrangement can be designed for higher flow rates.
For good edge conditions the span is 1:100.
For very large flow rates rectangular weirs are used, with the disadvantage of a limited
measuring accuracy in the lower part of the measuring range.
h
b
b
H
w
A B
Fig. 2-121: Rectangular Weir without (A) and with (B) Side Contraction
The basis for the calculations is Equation (1.27). For rectangular weirs without side
contractions (Fig. 2-121a) applies:
2
q v = --- b 2g h 3 / 2 (2.38)
3
where the discharge coefficient is and he = h + 0.0011 (m):

h
= 0.602 + 0.083 ----
w
for:
h-
w 0.3 m; --- 1; 0.025 h 0.8 m
w
Because of the side containment of the overflow stream in a rectangular weir without
contractions the air supply can become restricted. Therefore ventilation must be as-
sured.
159
For side contractions the basic equation is applied.
2
q v = --- b 2g h 3 / 2
3
for a coefficient: = 0.6161 0.1 ---

h
b
for: 0.075 h 0.6 m b 2 h max 0.3 m
The span of the rectangular weir is 1:20. The measurement of the height h is made ap-
proximately 4 x h upstream of the weir. The water velocity should not exceed 6 cm/s
upstream of the weir. And naturally the water level after the weir must be low enough
to permit an overflow; therefore the height between the lower edge of the opening must
be at least 5 cm above the lower water level.
Venturi Flume Flowmeter

For flow measurement using measuring weirs the water must be dammed which may
cause changes in the inflow area under certain conditions. These restrictions do not ap-
ply to a Venturi flume.
Flow rate indicator
Float Hydraulic jump

h
s h1
t1
h2
t2
Elevated floor section

b1
b2
Horizontal floor
Fig. 2-122: Venturi Flume
Therefore it can react to the smallest flow rates. As with the Venturi nozzle the constric-
tion of the flow cross sectional area results in an energy conversion, which accelerates
the measuring medium in the region of the constriction. The constrictions are usually
at the sides; there are some however with elevated floor sections.
160
Calculations for the rectangular Venturi flume using Equation (1.27):
2
q v = --- b 2 2g h 3 / 2
3
The water level upstream of the flume inlet (headwater) is quiet, the water is in the sub-
critical regime. This occurs automatically because the water is dammed causing the
flow velocity v to decrease resulting in subcritical flow conditions.
The acceleration of the water in the constricted region must bring the water to a super-
critical state, so that the tailwater conditions do not have an effect on the flow level
ahead of the constriction. Only when this condition is assured will a unique relationship
exist between the level of the headwater and the flow rate. Subsequently, a subcritical
flow state may be reached again after the channel expansion characterized by a hy-
draulic jump and a standing wave. A backflow must be avoided, because it influences
the operation of the measuring system.
161
Channel Flowmeter Sensor
Once the measuring weirs or Venturi flumes have been installed, which provide defined
relations between the measurable values and the flow rate, a device is still needed with
which the liquid level can be measured and converted to flow rate proportional values.
The headwater level h can be measured directly or indirectly.
Direct measurement method

Float measurement
Indirect measurement method
Hydrostatic pressure measurement
Non-contact water level measurement using an echo-sounder
Hydrostatic pressure measurement using a bubbler
Float Measurement
The water level is sampled by a float whose elevation is mechanically transmitted to a
nonlinear scale or is electrically linearized and converted to a standardized output sig-
nal. Contamination, fouling, mechanical abrasion, and frost can affect the float and
transmitting element, and since these affect the flow profile they are responsible for er-
rors. Possibly the float will have to be installed in a separate float chamber. Additionally,
increased maintenance expenditures must be expected.
These are the reasons that a float measurement is seldom used in these applications.
Hydrostatic Pressure Measurement

The hydrostatic pressure is the force exerted by a column of water above a reference
point. The measured pressure is proportional to the height.
p = h g + p0 (2.40)
The reference point A must lie below

P0
the minimum water level.
4... 20 mA
h
Fig. 2-123: Hydrostatic Pressure Measurement
162
In a Venturi flume it is possible to integrate the measurement location in the floor of the
flume. Fig. 2-123 shows a specially designed transmitter for installation in a side wall.
The transmitter (Fig. 2-124) includes an extended diaphragm flush-mounted to the

flume wall. An oil fill transmits the diaphragm pressure to a capacitive measuring cell
that generates the 0/4...20 mA output signal.
Fig. 2-124: Pressure Transmitter Type 266MDT for Level Measurement
The measuring cell operates as a differential pressure meter in the sense that the mi-
nus side is open to the atmospheric pressure po. This pre-pressure po is applied to both
sides of the diaphragm and is, thus, self-cancelling. As the transmitter is mounted to
the side wall, the zero of the transmitter can be adjusted such that the lower range val-
ue is based on the channel floor. Naturally, communication between the device and
modern process control systems is possible via an interface or a fieldbus coupler. The
measuring ranges lie between 1 and 10000 kPa
The diaphragm flush-mounted to the inner wall of the flume is unaffected by deposits
and contamination.
Bubbler Method
h
Fig. 2-125: Bubbler Method
163
A probe is inserted into the measuring medium either from the side or from the bottom
and air or an inert gas is injected into the flume; the air bubbles to the top, thus the
name bubbler method.
For injecting the gas a purgemeter type 10A6100 with needle valve and differential
pressure regulator is used. After the regulator, which acts as a restriction, a pressure
exists in the probe which is the same as the hydrostatic pressure at the end of the tube.
The needle valve is used to set the bubble flow rate and the differential pressure regu-
lator to maintain a constant flow rate. A pressure transmitter processes the level pro-
portional pressure.
The advantage of the bubbler method lies in the fact that the sensitive measuring ele-
ments are not in contact with the measuring medium and are therefore not subjected
to chemical or mechanical attack. Additionally, the cost for providing sufficient protec-
tion for use in hazardous areas is minimal.
Echo-sounder Method
The most successful water level measurement method is the noncontacting echo-
sounder method. A sound signal is transmitted from a sound generator located above
the water level which, after it is reflected from the water surface, is received. The dis-
tance between the transmitter/receiver and the water level (i.e. the headwater level) is
calculated from the transit time of the sound wave. The sound velocity however is a
function of the composition of the elements in the sound path, including temperature
and humidity which can vary. A reference path, which is precisely defined mechanical-
ly, can be used to compensate for these disturbance factors.
Transmitter
Reference
reflector Sensor
Actual level
Zero level Z
100%
level
Measuring
range
0%
level
Typical channel
Fig. 2-126: Echo-sounder Method
164
A cone is installed at the sensor to protect against external influences, e.g. snow fall
and to shield against undesirable wall reflections.
The connected transmitter includes a microprocessor which uses stored curves for dif-
ferent flume meters to calculate the flow rate proportional 0/4 ... 20 mA output signal.
Naturally such transmitters provide self-monitoring functions, alarm contacts and vol-
ume totalizers.
2.3.2 Flow Measurement in Free Surface Pipelines

There are closed pipeline systems which are not continuously filled with liquid but run
partially full because their size had to be selected to accommodate sporadic high flows.
The most important example is in the waste water lines, in which the flow at night is
small, somewhat more during the day, but is extremely high after a rain storm. This ap-
plication requires a flowmeter which provides accurate measuring values under all
these conditions.
The waste water containing solids prevents the installation of devices projecting into
the pipeline. Therefore, the ideal measuring device is an electromagnetic flowmeter.
With one minor disadvantage: the actually measured variable is the flow velocity v.
The desired flow rate is available only after multiplying by the filled cross sectional area
A, qv = v A . Since A, as noted above, is constantly changing there are two possible
solutions for the measurement. Either arrange the pipeline so that it always runs full or
install the electromagnetic flowmeter FXP4000 specifically designed for these applica-
tions.
Electromagnetic Flowmeter in a Culvert

A culvert (Fig. 2-127) can be used to assure that the pipe always runs full and a correct
measurement can be made. An argument against the culverts is the danger that solids
will be deposited, especially in waste water applications.
Fig. 2-127: Electromagnetic Flowmeter in a Culvert
165
The drag force of flowing water, which increases with increasing flow rate, is often un-
derestimated. Deposits are flushed from the culvert when the flow is high. This condi-
tion can also be induced by damming the water ahead of the culvert for short periods
of time. Another possibility is to install a separate line for flushing.
Fig. 2-128: Culvert with a High Water Bypass Line
Higher flow velocities in the culvert prevent deposits. The pipeline is designed with a
cross sectional area that during periods of high water rain storm is actually under-
sized.
A solution to this problem is to install a bypass culvert and install a weir in the main pipe-
line (Fig. 2-121) which has the disadvantage, that during high water flows, some of the
water will not be metered. In contrast to the electromagnetic flowmeter FXP4000 the
culvert method has the advantage that more accurate meters can be used for partially
full conditions. The cost advantage of smaller meters is usually offset by the higher con-
struction costs.
Electromagnetic Flowmeter FXP4000 (PARTI-MAG II)

for Partially Full Pipelines
It is known that the electromagnetic flowmeters described in Chapter 2.2.6 provide a
signal proportional to the flow velocity v and that the flow rate qv can be calculated by
multiplying this value by the constant cross sectional area A. The device requires that
in the measuring section, the pipe cross section remain full. This requirement cannot
be fulfilled for free surface flows. Therefore an electromagnetic flowmeter can only
measure accurately if the fill level is included in the calculation. This is the fundamental
idea behind the design of the FXP4000.
166
For the determination of two unknown values the laws of algebra state that two inde-
pendent equations, or in this case, two measured values are required.
These measured values are determined as follows:

The volume flow to be measured flows through a meter tube insulated with a liner. Us-
ing externally mounted magnet coils at the top and bottom, a magnetic field is generat-
ed in the meter tube cross section.
Full pipe electrode
Upper magnetic coil
Liner
Electrode pair A
Electrode pair B
Lower magnetic coil
Electrode pair C
Electrode pair D
Fig. 2-129: Design of the Flowmeter Sensor
As shown in Fig. 2-129, the transmitter of the FXP4000 flowmeter contains four pairs
of electrodes installed at different levels. To measure the voltage induced in the flow-
ing liquid the optimally placed electrode pair A, B or C, based on the fill level, is used.
In this way flow rates from a fill level of 10 % all the way up to a full pipe condition can
be measured. This corresponds to 5 % of the cross sectional flow area.
The electrodes are installed perpendicular to the flow direction and to the magnetic
field. The induced voltages are measured at these electrodes. When the pipe is full this
voltage, as in the usual electromagnetic flowmeter, is a direct measure for the aver-
age flow velocity.
In contrast, in a partially full pipeline the voltage measured at the electrodes must be
corrected using a factor. It is determined using a curve stored in the transmitter.
167
Fkorr
1
A
B
C
0
1 Urec / Uinj 2
Urec / Uinj(0)
Fig. 2-130: Correction Curves for Flow Velocity Proportional Voltages Measured at Electrode
Pairs A, B, C
The correction curves depicted in Fig. 2-130 show the relationship between two voltag-
es Urec/ Uinj.
With the FXP4000 electromagnetic flowmeter a device has been designed that com-
bines the advantages of the system described earlier and eliminates the disadvantages
when the pipeline is partially full. There are no additional pressure drops, costly con-
structions are eliminated, and the smallest flow rates at low levels or large flow rates
when the pipeline is full can be metered.
Fig. 2-131: FXP4000 Electromagnetic Flowmeter Sensor and Transmitter
168
The quality of the measurement is a function of the velocity profile in the filled state.
The accuracy at a full pipeline condition is 1 % of rate; at partially full conditions an ac-
curacy of 3 to 5 % of rate can be achieved down to a minimum fill level of 10 % DN.
l/min m3 /h l/s
Sizing
2
The nominal diameter of the transmitter is
3 5 determined using the adjoining nomo-
4
2
graph based on the maximum flow rate
10
5 3 under a full meter tube condition utilizing
8 the current flow velocity
2
106 6
8 5
4
6 10 4
5 3 8
4
6
2
3 5
4
2
4 3
10
00 00
8
12 14
2
N N
105
D D
6
8 5
0 0 00
4
103
50 60 70 80 90 10
6
N DN DN DN DN DN DN DN
5 3 8
4
6
Volume flow rate
2
3 5
0
4
2
0
3
103
8
0
40
2
4
10 6
0
25 30 35
8 5
D
4
0
2
6 10
N
5 3
D
8
4
N
D
2 6
3 5
0
20
4
N
D
2
10 2 3
0
15
8
N
D
2
103 6
8 5
4
6 10
5 3 8
4
6
2
3 5
4
2
3
10
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 %
Flow velocity m/s
Fig. 2-132: Flow Rates as a Function of the Nominal Diameter
169
A special case is the sizing for sloped water and waste water pipelines. In this case the
flow velocity is determined from the friction and the slope of the pipeline. The velocity
can be calculated by using the resistance coefficient. According to Nikuradse the fol-
lowing applies for a rough wall pipe with turbulent flow:
h 2g d
v = ----v- -------------- (2.42)
l
with the pipe diameter d in mm and the roughness k in mm. For steel or cast iron pipes
an approximation can be calculated using k = 1. To calculate the flow velocity the Dar-
cy-Weisbach equation is used and after conversion becomes:
1
= -----------------------------------------
-2
(2.41)
2 lg ---- d-
+ 1.14
k
with the ratio hv/l for the slope. The value v determined for the full pipe can be used for
comparison with the flow rate in the nomograph (Fig. 2-118). As already mentioned, the
accuracy is a function of the uniformity of the flow profile, especially when the pipe is
partially full.
This condition can only be satisfied in a long pipeline with constant roughness when
flow disturbances like flow profile changes in the pipeline, projections or connections in
the pipe wall, deposits, and other wave and vortex producing influences are located
sufficiently far from the measuring point. An ideal situation is one in which uniform flow
exists. This fact is the basis for the recommendation that inlet sections of 5 x D and out-
let sections of 2 x D should be installed.
170
Electrode Materials
Liner Material Electrode Material
Hard rubber, soft rubber Stainl. steel 1.4571
Hastelloy C or B
PTFE, PFA Hastelloy C
Hastelloy B, Ti, Ta, Pt-Ir
Nominal Diameters and Pressures

Liner Material DN PN
Hard rubber 150...1400 6...40
Soft rubber 150...1400 6...40
PTFE 150...600 10...40
Specifications
Process connection Flanges
Explosion protection Zone 1
Upper range value 0.5...10 m/s
Max. meas. error Full pipe: 1 % of rate
Partially full pipe: 3 or 5 % of rate
Output 0/4...20 mA
0/2...10 mA
Pulse output Active 24 V DC
Passive (optoelectronic coupler) 5...25 V, 5...200 mA
Interface RS 485
Supply power 24 V, 115 V, 230 V, 50/60 Hz
171
3 Regulations and Requirements Regarding
Quality, Environment, Safety and Data Protection
3.1 Integrated Management System
In order for a company to be financially viable it must operate in a correct, market-ori-
ented manner. Therefore, the highest goal must be to fulfill the customers' require-
ments. Optimal functionality and a long service lifetime at reasonable prices are expect-
ed for the products. Product liability requires manufacturing in compliance with the
safety requirements, the applicable standards and regulations, and the generally rec-
ognized codes of good practice.
In every company there were and are organizational and procedural systems for the
accomplishment of these tasks. The DIN EN ISO 9000 series of standards about qual-
ity management systems worked out and issued in 1983 has become a well-proven ba-
sis which allows for international comparability and requires constant monitoring by in-
dependent organizations.
Additionally, ABB is committed to active quality and environmental awareness, to safe-

ty at work and health protection of its staff, to compliance with the regulations concern-
ing careful handling of personal data, and to an open information policy. The individual
management systems for quality, environmental protection, safety at work, health pro-
tection and data and information protection have been united in a consistent system:
the integrated management system.This system meets all requirements on a quality
management system to ISO 9001, an environmental management system to ISO
14001, a management system for safety at work and health protection to BS OHSAS
18001 and all relevant national laws regarding the protection of data and information.
173
Fig. 3-1: Certificates
174
Fig. 3-2:
175
3.2 Degrees of Protection per EN 60529 (Excerpts from
the Standard Sheet)
The standard EN 60529 classifies the protection of electrical equipment by housings,
enclosures, or the like. It defines various degrees of protection (IP).
The standard 60529 includes:

Protection of personnel against electric shock from parts that are energized during
operation or from approach to such parts as well as protection against physical con-
tact with moving parts within the equipment (housings) and protection of the equip-
ment against entry of solid objects (physical contact and foreign object protection)
Protection of equipment against damaging ingress of water (water protection)
Identification
The degrees of protection are designated by a code consisting of the two fixed code
letters IP (Ingress Protection Rating) followed by two code numbers which identify the
degree of protection.
The first code number indicates the degree of protection against physical contact and
foreign bodies. The second code number indicates the degree of protection against the
damaging ingress of water.
For designating the full IP code (letters and numbers) the standardized term Degree
of protection is to be used.
Degree of protection EN 60529- IP 4 4

Name
EN standard number
Code letters
First code number (see Tab. 3-1)
Second code number (see Tab. 3-2)
A housing with the code shown in the example above is protected against the penetra-
tion of solid foreign bodies with a diameter greater than 1 mm and against water spray.
If the degree of protection of a part of the equipment, e.g. the terminals, should be dif-
ferent from the degree of protection of the main part, the IP code of the deviating part
must be specified separately. In this case, the lower degree of protection is indicated
first.
Example: Terminals IP 00 Housing IP 54
176
Degrees of Protection Against Contact and Foreign Bodies
First Degree of Protection

Code Number (Protection Against Contact and Foreign Bodies)
0 No special protection
1 Protection against solid foreign bodies with a diameter of 50 mm or greater (large

foreign bodies)1). No protection against intentional access, e.g. by hand, but
against contact with large surfaces.
2 Protection against solid foreign bodies with a diameter of 12 mm or greater

(medium size foreign bodies)1). Protection against contact with fingers or
similarly sized objects.
3 Protection against solid foreign bodies with a diameter of 2.5 mm or greater

(small foreign bodies)1) 2). Protection against tools, wires or similar objects with
a diameter or thickness greater than 2.5 mm.
4 Protection against solid foreign bodies with a diameter of 1 mm or greater

(granular foreign bodies)1) 2). Protection against tools, wires or similar objects
with a diameter or thickness greater than 1 mm.
5 Protection against ingress of damaging dust. The entry of dust is not totally
prevented, but dust must not enter in sufficient quantity to affect proper
operation of the equipment (protected against dust)3). Full protection against
contact.
6 Protection against the ingress of dust (dust-tight).

Full protection against contact.
1)
Equipment with the degree of protection 1 to 4 is protected against the penetration of regularly or irregularly
shaped foreign bodies where the dimensions in three perpendicular planes are larger than the specified di-
ameter.
2)
For the degrees of protection 3 and 4 the application of this table falls under the jurisdiction of the respon-
sible technical committee when drain or vent holes exist in the equipment.
3)
For the degrees of protection 5 and the application of this table falls under the jurisdiction of the responsible
technical committee when drain or vent holes exist in the equipment.
Tab. 3-1: Degrees of Protection for the First Code Number
177
Degrees of Protection Against Water Ingress
Second Degree of Protection

Code Number (Protection against Water Ingress)
0 No special protection
1 Protection against vertical water drips. The water must not have a harmful
effect (dripping water)
2 Protection against vertical water drips. Vertically dripping water shall have
with the equipment (enclosure) tilted by 15 compared to its normal position
no harmful effect (slanted falling water).
3 Protection against water falling at any angle up to 60 as compared to the ver-

tical position. It must not have any harmful effect (spray water).
4 Protection against water splashed from any angle or direction against the equip-
ment (housing). It must not have a harmful effect (splash water).
5 Protection against a water jet from a nozzle, projected from any direction
against the equipment (enclosure). The water jet must not have a harmful
effect (water jet).
6 Protection against water from heavy seas or powerful jets. The water must not
ingress into the equipment (enclosure) in harmful quantities (flooding).
7 Protection against water when the equipment (enclosure) is immersed in water

under defined conditions in pressure and time. The water must not ingress in
harmful quantities (immersion).
8 The equipment (enclosure) is suitable for continuous submergence in water

under conditions which shall be specified by the manufacturer (submersion).
1)
This degree of protection usually means that the equipment is hermetically sealed.
With specific types of equipment water may ingress, but only to such an extent that it produces no
harmful effect.
Tab. 3-2: Degrees of Protection for the Second Code Number
178
3.3 Requirements Regarding Interference Immunity (EMC)
The measuring electronics of flowmeters are constantly becoming more efficient and
more compact. Digital data processing with its microprocessors has opened up new av-
enues for new communications, diagnostic functions, and short response times. The
integral mount design also requires new ways in terms of the power supply. Advanced
measuring electronics are usually provided with switch-mode power supplies. In order
to ensure reliable functionality and a high immunity to interference, the measuring elec-
tronics are subjected to various tests. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) plays an es-
sential role.
With the advent of the common European market, the European Union has adopted
various directives. It is stipulated that all devices released to the European market must
comply with the valid directives. This is visible to the customer through the CE mark
that has to be attached to the devices, and the CE declaration of conformity delivered
with the devices.
Over the years, the measuring electronics and, thus, the requirements on the test pro-
cedures have considerably changed. The EMC Directive has been revised to meet
these new requirements. Since July 20, 2007, the new EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
has been in force and applied by the manufacturers.
At national level, the new EMC Directive 2004/108/EC has been implemented, among
others, through the generic standards EN 61000-6-2:2005 (Immunity standard for in-
dustrial environments) and EN 61000-6-4:2007 (Emission standard for industrial envi-
ronments). EN 61326 is the product standard for Electrical equipment for measure-
ment, control and laboratory use. All ABB flowmeters comply with these standards and
directives.
Besides the requirements stipulated in EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, there are addition-
al requirements, for example for the chemical industry, which are defined in the NA-
MUR Recommendations. Here, more stringent test requirements are stipulated than in
the EMC Directive, for example a higher immunity test level.
Moreover, there exist special requirements from the Organisation Internationale de

Mtrologie Lgale (OIML) (English name: International Organization of Legal Metrolo-
gy) regarding the measuring accuracy under the influence of electromagnetic interfer-
ence.
179
Types of Interference
In the context of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) a distinction is made between two
different types of interference:
The conducted interference is transmitted directly from the interference source via
the supply or signal line to the load. For example, a clicking noise that you hear on
your radio may be caused by your electrical water boiler being switched off. The au-
tomatic switch-off of the water boiler's supply voltage generates a voltage pulse, the
spectrum of which lies within the audible frequency range. When voltage pulses of
this kind are transmitted via the radio power cord, the clicking interference occurs.
The radiated interference is transmitted to the load via electromagnetic fields and can
be received, for example, by a printed circuit board track operating as an antenna.
Also, capacitive or inductive coupling of electrical or magnetic fields is possible. An
example of radiated interference is a cell phone communication coupled into a radio.
The reason for this may be an insufficiently shielded loudspeaker.
Interference Causes
An interference signal may be caused by a voltage variations in time or by currents, e.g.
resulting from a switching operation. These produce periodic voltage or current chang-
es. The currents and voltages of the interference source that are variable in time cause
magnetic or electrical fields which may generate an interference signal at the load.In-
terference sources may have the following technical or natural causes:
Variations in / interruptions of the supply voltage
Electromagnetic fields, generated by transmitters operating in the frequency range
from few kHz (long wave transmission) up to several GHz (cell phones, microwave
ovens).
Lightning electromagnetic pulses (LEMP)
Surge voltage pulses caused by switching operations in low-voltage networks
High-frequency, low-power burst pulses caused by switching operations of switch-
mode power supplies
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
High-frequency signals produced by load changes of microprocessors or frequency
converters
A nuclear electromagnetic pulse (NEMP) produced by a nuclear weapon explosion
Interference signals are often generated by electrical switches, relays, contactors, flu-
orescent lamps, solenoid valves, electric motors, radio transceivers or atmospheric dis-
turbances like lightning.
180
Evaluation of the Interference Response
The interference response of a device is a means of evaluating how a device reacts in
the event of a disturbance or interference. There are three evaluation criteria:
No reduction in functionality.
Mainly analog devices may be affected within their error limits. Purely digital devices
must not be affected at all.
Reduction in functionality.
A certain reduction of the functionality while the device is subjected to the interfer-
ence is permissible under the proviso that the device is capable of automatically re-
suming normal operation once the interference is over. No permanent damage may
be caused.
Loss of functionality.
Evaluated is primarily the functional failure at the onset of an interference until an au-
tomatic or manual restart occurs. When the tolerances are exceeded or underscored,
the devices must be capable of restarting automatically or must remain, ready for re-
start, in their defined fail-safe position.
Limitation of Interferences
Interferences can be limited by EMI/RFI shielding of the interference source or by pro-
viding a sufficient interference immunity of the load.
In order to achieve an EMC compliant circuit layout, the following measures are taken:
Avoid unnecessary switching operations
Perform unavoidable switching operations as slowly as technically possible
Limit unavoidable interference as far as possible by using the appropriate design el-
ements on site (e.g. RC elements for interference shielding, shielded housings or
cables)
Choose a PCB layout that complies with the EMC requirements (e.g. adapt the length
of the PCB tracks to the frequency, use grounding planes for shielding)
Ensure sufficient interference immunity (e.g. through filters, blocking capacitors or
failure-tolerant software)
Regarding the overall EMC protection independent of the individual devices, the follow-
ing is aspired:
Determine interference sources and loads through system analyses.
Provide for sufficient shielding.
Keep the specified distances.
Improve the interference immunity of the load.
Electromagnetic compatibility of plants and systems can be reliably realized by intro-

ducing an interference protection concept with defined conditions for the devices to be
used.
181
3.4 Explosion Protection
Among the variety of products and intermediate products of the chemical and industrial
process industries there are many which can form explosive mixtures with other prod-
ucts or with the oxygen in the air. Measurement and control equipment that comes into
contact with such mixtures must not cause an explosion, but must nevertheless oper-
ate effectively.
In order for an explosion to occur, a number of events must occur simultaneously:

A sufficient degree of dispersion (degree of scattering) for mist or dust require particle
sizes between 0.1 and 0.001 mm. For gases this degree is provided by nature.
Only when the concentration of a flammable substance in air exceeds a minimum val-
ue does the danger of an explosion exist. On the other hand there is a maximum val-
ue (a too rich mixture) above which an explosion can no longer take place.
Naturally a sufficient amount of the mixture must be available. As little as 10 liters of
an explosive mixture are considered to be dangerous.
An ignition source must provide sufficient energy in order to initiate the explosion.
Considering these criteria some measures to prevent an explosion inevitably come to

mind:
Explosive mixtures are to be avoided, their quantity is to be limited, ignition must be

prevented and, in a worst case scenario, the impact of an explosion must be mitigated.
These measures are considered during the design of the instruments. For example, the
space in which an explosive mixture can accumulate is kept very small or the energy
content of a possible spark source is minimized or the explosion is restricted to a small
space.
182
3.4.1 International Orientation of Explosion Protection
All over the world, the explosion protection is governed by different, country-specific
national standards. For ABB products this means: the same technical design, but dif-
ferent, country-specific approvals. Only in this way a worldwide commercialization can
be achieved with little product variance, and customers throughout the world can use
the same product. On the customer side, this strategy yields cost reductions, e.g. for
training, project planning and maintenance of the corresponding products.
European USA Canada Russia Ukraine Australia

Union
Directive / ATEX FM Ex- CSA- GOST GOST IECEx
Standard / PTB Approval Certificate Russia Ukraine
Approval EXAM UL Ex-
Body BBG Approval
KEMA
TV Nord
ZELM
IBExU ...
Validity No restrictions No restric- No restric- 3 years 3 years No restric-
tions tions tions
Production yes yes yes no no yes
Supervision
Auditing
Tab. 3-3: Overview of Important Country-specific Standards, Approvals and Approval Bodies
Basically, the requirements for all approvals are similar to each other and pursue the
same goal: prevent, according to the state of the art, that an explosion can occur in a
plant that has been instrumented in compliance with the national explosion protection
requirements.
183
3.4.2 Terms and Definitions
Explosion
An explosion is an exothermic reaction of a substance at a very high reaction rate. It
requires the presence of an explosive mixture/atmosphere and of an ignition source
plus an extraneous cause that triggers the explosion.
Explosion Hazard
An explosion hazard is given if an explosive mixture/atmosphere is present, but is not
ignited by an ignition source or due to an extraneous cause.
Explosive Mixture/Atmosphere
Mixture of air and gases, vapors, mists or dusts that is flammable under atmospheric
conditions and in which the combustion is spread to the entire remaining unburnt mix-
ture once an ignition has occurred.
Explosion Limits
The lower (LEL) and upper (UEL) explosion limits specify the range within which an air
mixture of a substance is explosive. The explosion limits are specific to the individual
substances and can be looked up in the appropriate reference literature.
Explosion Groups in Accordance with the EN Standards

The flammability and resistance to ignition flash-over of an explosive mixture are spe-
cific to a substance. These specifications are especially important for equipment engi-
neering. For intrinsically safe electrical equipment the ignition energy is a criterion for
flammability. The lower the required ignition energy, the more hazardous the mixture.
The resistance to ignition flash-over provides for information relative to the maximum
experimental safe gap and the width of the flameproof joint of equipment with flame-
proof enclosure.
Explosion Group Ignition Energy Test Gas Range

I < 200 J1) Methane in air Firedamp protection
II A < 160 J1) Propane in air
II B < 60 J1) Ethylene in air Explosion protection
II C < 20 J1) Hydrogen in air
1)
Doubling the energy values is permissible if the charging voltage is < 200 V.
Tab. 3-4: List of Explosion Groups According to EN Standards
184
Gases and vapors are classified according to these criteria. The following table lists the
classification of various materials. The equipment used for these materials must be cer-
tified accordingly.
Explosion Ignition Temperature

Group T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
I Methane
II A Acetic acid Ethyl alcohol Benzine Acetyl alde-
Ethane i-amyl acetate Diesel fuel hyde
Ethyl acetate n-butane Aircraft fuel Ethyl ether
Ammonia n-butyl alcohol Heating oils
Benzene n-hexane
(pure)
Acetic acid
Methanol
Propane
Toluene
II B Carbon Ethylene Hydrogen Ethyl ether
monoxide sulfide Butyl ether
II C Hydrogen Acetylene Carbon
disulfide
Tab. 3-5: Classification of Materials By Explosion Groups
Flash Point
The flash point is the lowest temperature at which vapors can escape under defined
conditions from the liquid to be tested in a sufficient quantity to yield a flammable air-
liquid mixture above the liquid level.
Ignition Energy
The minimum ignition energy is the energy in a spark that suffices to ignite the sur-
rounding explosive gas-air mixture.
Ignition Temperature in Accordance with the EN Standards

The ignition temperature of a combustible material is the lowest temperature of a heat-
ed wall determined with a probe at which a mixture of the combustible material and air
will ignite.
The ignition temperature of liquids and gases is determined using the procedure spec-
ified in DIN 51794. For the time being, there is no standardized method for determining
the ignition temperature of combustible dusts. In the relevant literature several methods
are specified.
185
Combustible gases and vapors of combustible liquids a divided into temperature class-
es according to their ignition temperature. Equipment parts are classified by their sur-
face temperature.
Temperature Class Highest Permissible Ignition Temperatures

Surface Temperature of of Combustible Materials
the Equipment in C in C
T1 450 > 450 ...
T2 300 > 300 450
T3 200 > 200 300
T4 135 > 135 200
T5 100 > 100 135
T6 85 > 85 100
Tab. 3-6: Temperature Classes
Ignition Sources
In the following, the most frequently occurring ignition sources are listed:
Hot surfaces (heatings, hot apparatuses, etc.),
Flames and hot (combustion) gases
Mechanically produced sparks (through friction, strokes, abrasion)
Sparks from electrical systems,
Compensation currents,
Static electricity,
Lightning, ultrasonic sound
Optical ignition sources,
Electrical fields through radio waves,
...
Primary and Secondary Explosion Protection

In the context of avoiding explosions a distinction is made between primary and sec-
ondary explosion protection.
Primary explosion protection implies avoidance of the formation of a hazardous explo-

sive atmosphere:
Avoidance of combustible liquids and gases,
Increase of the flash point,
Avoidance of the formation of explosive mixtures by limiting the concentration of
substances,
Ventilation, either technical or through use of open air systems,
Concentration monitoring with emergency stop function
186
Secondary explosion protection includes all measures that can be taken to prevent the
ignition of a hazardous atmosphere:
No effective ignition source
- Intrinsically safe equipment
- Flameproof enclosure of the ignition source to prevent external ignition
Powder filling
Encapsulation
Flameproof enclosure
Pressurized enclosure
...
Zones in Accordance with the EN Standard

The hazardous area is divided into three zones. The probability of the existence of a
potentially hazardous atmosphere is a criterion for the division as described below:
For Gases, Vapors and Mists (EN 60079-10)

Zone 0: Area, in which a potentially explosive atmosphere in the form of a mixture of
air and combustible gases, vapors or mists is present continuously, for long
periods or frequently.
Category: 1 G
Zone 1: Area in which, during normal operation, a potentially explosive atmosphere

in the form of a mixture of air and combustible gases, vapors or mists can
occur occasionally.
Category: 2 G

in the form of a mixture of air and combustible gases, vapors or mists occurs
not at all or only for a short time period.
Category: 3 G
For Dusts (EN 61241-10)

Zone 20: Area in which a potentially explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of com-
bustible dust in air is present continuously, for long periods or frequently.
Category: 1 D
Zone 21: Area in which, during normal operation a potentially explosive atmosphere
in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air can occur.
Category: 2 D
187
in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air usually occurs not at all or
only for a short time period.
Category: 3 D
Remark:
Layers, deposits and accumulations of combustible dust must be taken into ac-
count to the same extent as any other cause that may lead to the formation of a
hazardous explosive atmosphere.
Normal operation is considered to be the state in which the plant or system is run
within its specified parameters and limits.
Equipment of Category 1G/1D, Equipment Group II

The categories 1G (gas) and 1D (dust) include all equipment designed in such a way
that it can be operated in compliance with the parameters specified by the manufactur-
er and provides a very high degree of safety.
Equipment of these categories is suited for installation in Zone 0 (1G equipment) and
Zone 20 (1D equipment). Equipment in this category is required to remain functional,
even in the event of rare incidents relating to equipment, with an explosive atmosphere
present, and is characterized by means of protection such that:
either, in the event of failure of one means of protection, at least an independent
second means provides the requisite level of protection,
or the requisite level of protection is assured in the event of two faults occurring
independently of each other.
Equipment in this category must comply with the supplementary requirements referred
to in Annex II, Number 2.1 of the EC Directive 94/9/EC.

The categories 2G (gas) and 2D (dust) comprise all equipment designed to be capable
of functioning in conformity with the operational parameters established by the manu-
facturer and ensuring a high level of protection.
Zone 21 (2D equipment). The means of protection relating to equipment in this catego-
ry ensure the requisite level of protection, even in the event of frequently occurring dis-
turbances or equipment faults which normally have to be taken into account.
188
The categories 3G (gas) and 3D (dust) comprise all equipment designed to be capable
of functioning in conformity with the operational parameters established by the manu-
facturer and ensuring a normal level of protection.
in Zone 22 (3D equipment) for a short time period.During normal operation equipment
in this category provides the required degree of safety.
DIV Division According to NEC500 (USA) and CEC Annex J (Canada)

In addition to the division into Zone 0 and Zone 1 according to European instrumenta-
tion standards for hazardous areas, NEC500 and CEC Annex J provide a classification
into Divisions. The following table is an overview of the individual zones and divisions.
IEC / EU Zone 0 Zone 1 Zone 2

US NEC505 Zone 0 Zone 1 Zone 2
US NEC500 Division 1 Division 2
CA CEC Section 18 Zone 0 Zone 1 Zone 2
CA CEC Annex J Division 1 Division 2
Tab. 3-7: Comparison of Zones and Divisions
IEC classification according to IEC 60079-10

EU classification according to EN60079-10
US classification according to ANSI/NF PA70 National Electrical Code Article 500
and/or 505
CA classification according to CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Section 18
and/or Annex J
Explosion groups according to NEC500 (USA) and CEC Annex J (Canada)

Explosion Group Explosion Group
US NEC500 US NEC505 Test Gas Range
CA CEC Annex J CA CEC Section 18
EU IEC
Mining I Methane Firedamp protection
Class I Group D II A Propane
Class I Group C II B Ethylene Explosion protection
Class II Group A II C Acetylene
Class I Group B II B + hydrogen Hydrogen
Tab. 3-8: List of Explosion Groups According to US/CA Standards
189
Temperature Classes According to NEC500 (USA) and CEC Annex J (Canada)
Max. US NEC505 US NEC 500
Surface Temperature CA CEC Section 18 CA CEC Annex J
EU IEC
450 C T1 T1
300 C T2 T2
280 C T2A
260 C T2B
230 C T2C
215 C T2D
200 C T3 T3
180 C T3A
165 C T3B
160 C T3C
135 C T4 T4
120 C T4A
100 C T5 T5
85 C T6 T6
Tab. 3-9: Division of Temperature Classes According to US/CA Standards
190
3.4.3 Types of Protection in Europe and North America
Type of protection Intrinsic Safety i according to EN 50020 or EN 60079-11

The equipment installed in the hazardous area contains only intrinsically safe circuits.
A circuit is intrinsically safe when sparks or thermal effects cannot occur under defined
test conditions (which include normal operation and certain malfunctions) which could
ignite a particular explosive atmosphere.
Explosive
atmosphere
R L
U C
Fig. 3-3: Schematic Representation of Intrinsic Safety
There are two categories of intrinsic safety.

Category "ia" for use in Zone 0:
The devices must be so designed that in the event of a failure or under every possible
combination of two failure modes an ignition is excluded.
Category "ib" for use in Zone 1:
The devices must be so designed that in the event of a failure an ignition is not possible.
191
Type of protection Flameproof Enclosure d according to EN 50018
or EN 60079-1
Parts which can ignite a potentially explosive atmosphere are contained in an enclo-
sure which itself will contain the pressure of an explosion of a hazardous mixture oc-
curring in its interior and prevent the explosion from reaching the atmosphere surround-
ing the enclosure through a special geometry of the gap.
Explosive
atmosphere
Gap s s w
l
Fig. 3-4: Schematic Representation of a Flameproof Enclosure
Type of protection Increased Safety e according to EN 50019 or EN 60079-7

In this case additional measures are incorporated to increase the degree of safety of
an instrument by preventing prohibited higher temperatures and the generation of
sparks and arcs inside or outside of the electrical equipment which during normal op-
eration will not occur.
Explosive
atmosphere
Fig. 3-5: Schematic Representation of Increased Safety
192
Type of protection Pressurized Enclosure p according to EN 50016
or EN 60079-13
The entry of an explosive atmosphere into the housing of electrical equipment is pre-
vented by filling the interior of the housing with an ignition protecting gas (air, inert or
other appropriate gas) under a pressure greater than that of the surrounding atmo-
sphere. The overpressure is maintained with or without constant flushing with protec-
tive gas.
Fig. 3-6: Schematic Representation of Pressurized Enclosure
Type of protection Oil Immersion o according to EN 50015 or EN 60079-6

Electrical equipment or parts thereof are made safe by by surrounding them with oil so
that an explosive atmosphere on the surface or outside of the housing will not be
ignited.
Fig. 3-7: Schematic Representation of Oil-Immersion
193
Type of protection Powder Filling q according to EN 50017 or EN 60079-5
The housing of electrical equipment is filled with sand or some other fine grained ma-
terial so that, when used as intended, an arc occurring within the housing will not ignite
an explosive atmosphere external to it. Ignition may not occur either by a flame or by
an increased temperature on the surface of the housing.

Fig. 3-8: Schematic Representation of Powder Filling
Type of protection Encapsulation m according to EN 50028 or EN 60079-18

Parts which could ignite an explosive atmosphere are encapsulated in a casting mate-
rial which is sufficiently resistant to the environment so that the explosive atmosphere
cannot be ignited by sparks or heating within the encapsulation.
Explosive
atmosphere
Fig. 3-9: Schematic Representation of Encapsulation
194
Type of protection Non-Sparking Equipment nA according to EN 50021
or EN 60079-15
Non-sparking equipment is designed so as to minimize the probability of the occur-
rence of arcs or sparks that could raise a risk of ignition during normal operation. Nor-
mal operation excludes the removal or insertion of components while the current circuit
is live.
Zone 2
n
Fig. 3-10: Schematic Representation of Non-sparking Electrical Equipment
195
3.4.4 Approvals According to the FM Approval Standards
Flowmeters from ABB fulfill the following FM standards, depending on the certification
and field of application:
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for
use in Class I, II and III, Division 1, and Class I, Zone 0 and 1.
Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Approval Standard Class Number 3610.
Nonincendive Electrical Equipment for
use in Class I and II, Division 2, and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2.
Hazardous (Classified) Locations. Approval Standard Class Number 3611.
Explosionproof Electrical Equipment General Requirements.
Approval Standard Class Number 3615.
The corresponding operating instruction and the Control Drawing must be observed
when installing the device. Additionally, the National Electrical Code (NEC) must be ob-
served for the installation.
3.4.5 Approvals in Accordance with the CSA Standards

Flowmeters from ABB fulfill one or more of the following CSA standards, depending on
the certification and field of application:
CAN/CSA-E60079-11:02 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres -
Part 11: Intrinsic safety i
C22.2 No.213-M1987 (Reaffirmed 1999) Non-incendive Electrical Equipment
for use in Class I, Division 2. Hazardous Locations.
C22.2 No. 30-M1986 (Reaffirmed 1999) Explosion-proof Enclosures
for use in Class I. Hazardous Locations.
The corresponding operating instruction and the Control Drawing must be observed
when installing the device. Additionally, the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Part I
(Safety Standard for Electrical Installation) must be observed for installation.
196
3.4.6 Free Movement of Goods Related to Explosion-Proof Electrical
Devices
The prerequisite for the free movement of goods within the European Community is
governed by EC Directives. Since July 1st, 2003, the Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX 95, for-
merly 100a) must be applied.
Additionally, ATEX 95 a conformity evaluation of the Quality Assurance of the manu-

facturer, which includes special requirements for explosion proof equipment during de-
velopment, design and manufacturing.
Device that have been tested in accordance with ATEX 95 and for which a Type Exam-
ination Certificate has been granted by the certifying body are additionally identified by
a CE mark. The identification number of the test body who has evaluated the quality
assurance is also added.
The specifications and the safety-relevant sections of the operating instruction must be
provided in the national language of the country where the product is used.
3.4.7 Identification of Equipment

Equipment intended for use in hazardous areas must be uniquely identified by the man-
ufacturer. To comply with EN 50014 or EN 60079-0 / EN 50020 or EN 60079-11 the
equipment must be labeled with the following information:
Manufacturer name and address
CE mark
Designation of the series and type
Serial number, if applicable
Year of manufacture
Special identification for the prevention of explosions in conjunction with the identifi-
cation of the category
For the equipment group II the letter G (for areas in which potentially explosive gas,
vapor, mist and air mixtures are present) and/or the letter D
(for areas where dust may form potentially explosive atmospheres).
197
Example of an ABB Explosion Protection Classification and Identification
FCM2000 MC27
KEMA 08ATEX0150 X 1
II 1/2G Ex d e [ia] [ib] IIC T6...T2>= DN50
II 2G Ex d e [ia] [ib] IIC T6...T2<= DN40
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T115C...TFluid
II 2D Ex tD [iaD] A21 IP6X T115C...TFluid
IECEx KEMA08.0034X
Ga/Gb Ex d e [ia] [ib] IIC T6...T2>= DN50
2
Ex d e [ia] [ib] IIC T6...T2<= DN40
Ex tD A21 IP6X T115C...TFluid
Ex tD [iaD] A21 IP6X T115C...TFluid
3
Electrical data, ignition class of output circuits and
temperature classes, see EC-Type Examination Certificate. 4
Order no.: 240134885x001 5
Model no.: MC27B11F25F11MGCCB1G
U/f nom: 230V AC Smax: <25VA 6
Size: "F" DN25 / 1 / Type:4X , IP 67 7
Tamb: -20C ... +60C
8
Fitting: DN25 / 1" / PN40
Material: 1.4571 / 1.4308 (316Ti/CF8) K: 80.02 9
Kal.: F: +/- 0.1% D: 5g/l Var.: HART 10
Qmax DN: 160kg/min TAG no.: FT-402
11
12
13
1 ATEX approval 7 Ambient temperature

2 IECEx approval 8 Process conn. and pressure rating
3 Order number 9 Meas. tube material and calibr. factor
4 Full model number 10 Type of communication
5 Power supply and maximum 11 TAG number
power consumption 12 Calibration accuracy
6 Nom. diameter and degree of protection 13 Max. flow rate
Fig. 3-11: Example of a Device Identification (here acc. to ATEX)
EC Type Examination Certificate KEMA 08 ATEX 0150 X

KEMA = Approval body
08 = Year of approval
ATEX = Directive 94/9 EC
0150 = Serial number
X = Special conditions
Ex-Coding: II 1/2G Ex d e [ia] [ib] IIC T6 ... T2

II = Explosion group
1/2 = Category 1 and Category 2
G = Gases, vapors, mists
Ex = Identification of the degree of explosion protection
d = Type of protection flameproof enclosure
e = Type of protection increased safety
ia = Type of protection intrinsic safety, 2-fault safety
ib = Type of protection intrinsic safety, 1-fault safety
IIC = Explosion group IIC
T6 ...T2 = Temperature class
198
3.5 GOST Approvals for Flow Measurement
Note: ABB cannot assume any liability regarding possible legal amendments of the ap-
proval procedures or formalities nor for possible legal regulations that are additionally
valid in Russia, Belarus, Ukraine and Kazakhstan.
3.5.1 Russia
GOST-R Certificate of Conformity
The GOST-R certificate is obligatory.
Origin
The designation Gost-R Certificate of Conformity has established itself in the course
of time. It is a translation from the Russian word for compliance certificate meaning
that the certified product meets the requirments of the corresponding GOST standards.
Introduction of the GOST-R Certification System

In 1989, the Russian authorities introduced preliminary regulations for the assurance
of products manufactured and commercialized in Russia in order to provide for con-
sumer protection. In the early 90ies these regulations have come into force. This was
the legal and technical basis for the creation of the national certification system. From
1992 on these regulations have been put into practice.
All products that are produced or imported into the Russian Federation are subjected
to obligatory certification. The GOST-R Certificate of Conformity corresponds to the CE
Declaration of Conformity.
The GOST-R certificate differs from the CE declaration in that the CE Declaration of
Conformity can be issued by the manufacturer himself whereas the GOST-R Certificate
of Conformity can only be awarded by an external certification company.
199
Certification Process
First the products are inspected either in the laboratory or on site. An expert from the
certification company verifies the inspection results and then decides whether a certif-
icate can be awarded or not. The customs tariff number and the OKP code (Russian
product classification code) are determined. Then the certificate is issued. Certified
products are subjected to marking obligations and must be identified accordingly on the
packing, on the name plate and in the product documentation.
The certificate is an important paper of the export documents when exporting products
to Russia. Besides the GOST-R Certification there are other certifications and approv-
als. On the Russian domestic market these certificates are an essential quality feature
the advertising effect of which should not be underestimated. The end user considers
a certificate as a token of high quality.
There are, however, product groups that do not require the GOST-R certification. For
these products so-called negative certificates are issued.
There are various types of GOST-R certificates:

Contract-Related Certificate
This certificate is issued for a sales contract and is valid until the terms of the contract
are fulfilled.
The contract must be concluded with a Russian customer who imports the products into
Russia.
Certificates with a Validity Period of 1 to 3 Years

With this type of certificate the exporting company can export their products as often
as required within the specified time period. For a certificate with a validity of 3 years
the Russian authorities require onsite audit inspections at the manufacturer's plant.
200
Valid from - to
Certificate
Certification number
company
Products Russian product

classification
GOST standards
Customs tarif number
Manufacturer
Applicant
Test reports,
certificates, etc. Additional
information
Authorized
signatures
and official
stamp
GOST Metrology (Pattern Approval Certificate)

The measuring equipment approval also called the metrology certificate is an obligato-
ry certificate for the flow measurement.
This certificate is a special variant and requires that a GOST-R certificate has already
been issued. It mainly deals with the operational security of measuring devices. The
Russian agency for technical regulation and metrology (Rostechregulierovanie) is in
charge of issuing this certificate. The approval requires that the device is previously
verified by accredited experts from a state-run metrological institution.
201
The registration includes the entry of the device in the database of the regulatory au-
thority. The advantage is that an already registered device does not have to be re-reg-
istered.
GOST Explosion Protection

The GOST-EX certificate is obligatory for explosion proof flowmeters. GOST-EX certi-
fications are performed by accredited Russian test laboratories. Approvals of this kind
are always required when products with ATEX approval are imported into Russia. The
approval is based on the valid EC type examination certificates in accordance with
ATEX95.
The approval procedure includes, among other things, the inspection of the manufac-
turer plant and a type inspection of specific selected product types through the com-
missioned Russian certification agency. The certificate has a validity period of up to
three years. Prolongation of the validity period must be requested in good time before
its expiry. The entire approval procedure will take approximately three to four months.
202
Valid from - to
Certificate
Certification number
company
Products Russian product

classification
GOST standards
Customs tarif number
Manufacturer
Applicant
Test reports, Additional

certificates, etc. information
Authorized
signatures
and official
stamp
GOST-RTN Permit to Use

The GOST-RTN permit to use is an obligatory certificate which provides permission to
operate explosion proof flowmeters in hazardous areas. RTN permits to use are grant-
ed by the Federal Service for Ecological, Technological and Nuclear Supervision or
Rostekhnadzor (RTN), previously the Federal Mining and Industrial Inspectorate of
Russia, or Gosgortekhnadzor (GGTN). Rostekhnadzor is responsible for the develop-
ment and observance of standards for industrial safety and quality. The Rostekhnadzor
permit to use is an operating permit for machines and systems which pose a potential
risk or are used in hazardous areas, for example in underground mines, smelting works
or petrochemical production plants.
Among the hazardous equipment or technical devices for which RTN permits to use are
required are production plants/facilities, valves, fired or non-fired pressure vessels,
equipment for the chemical industry, equipment for the oil and gas production, equip-
ment for underground mining, explosion-proof plants and equipment, gas appliances,
gas grids, etc. An independent laboratory prepares an expertise for the RTN permit to
use. Subsequently, all documents are submitted to Rostekhnadzor. The product-relat-
ed documents and the expertise are examined by experts. An expert then decides
whether all safety requirements are fulfilled and, if the results of the above checks are
positive, draws up an official document.
The prerequisite of the RTN permit to use is that a GOST-R certificate and, for explo-
sion proof device variants, a GOST EX certificate has been issued for the respective
product. The permission must be granted before commissioning. The approval can be
contract-related or have a validity period of five (5) years.
203
204
3.5.2 Belarus, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
Certification for Belarus
Generally speaking the certification procedure for Belarus is similar to those in the
Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) and the Russian Federation. There are,
however, some differences which must be taken into account in order to provide for an
unproblematic and quick exportation of products to Belarus.
The official certification institution of Belarus is the Department on Supervision of Safe

Works Realization in the Industry of the Ministry for Emergency Situations of Belarus
Republic (Gospromnadzor). Like its Russian counterpart Gospromnadzor grants certif-
icates on the basis of an expertise submitted by accredited experts after having com-
pleted the accreditation procedure. In their expertise the experts confirm that the prod-
uct to be imported complies with the regulatory rules of Belarus. As a rule, inspections
on site are required.
Mandatory certificates for flowmeters are similar to Russia the metrology certificate
and the EX-Promatomnadzor certificate which unites the Russian GOST-EX certificate
and the RTN permit to use in a single certificate.
Certification for Ukraine

The regulatory rules for Ukraine regarding the import of foreign products are basically
the same as for the Russian Federation (Russia), but may differ in details. The equiv-
alent to the GOST-R certificate is the UkrSEPRO certificate which, for the time being,
is considered as not obligatory for flowmeters. Moreover, the following certificates may
be required in both Ukraine and the Russian Federation (Russia) for the importation of
flowmeters in individual cases:
Metrology certificate
GOST-EX certificate with expert decision
DVSC certificate (EX operating permit)
In Ukraine the certification procedure itself is more complex than in Russia and requires
additional expert knowledge regarding the national decrees and laws in order to be able
to successfully complete the certification process.Another difference is the proceeding
of the accredited test institutes. The majority of the required tests and examinations are
performed directly at the manufacturer's site. Usually, the experts must visit the com-
pany.
205
Certification for Kazakhstan
The regulatory rules for Kazakhstan regarding the import of foreign products are basi-
cally the same as for the Russian Federation (Russia), but may differ in details. The
equivalent for the GOST-R certificate is the GOST-K certificate. Moreover, the follow-
ing certificates are required in both Kazakhstan and the Russian Federation (Russia)
for the import and marketing of flowmeters:
GOST-K Certificate: may be obtained on site by own sales representatives.

EX Permit to Use and EX Permission: unites the GOST-EX certificate and the RTN
permit to use according to the Russian standard.
Metrology Certificate: is issued by the KasInMetr authority.
The certification procedure itself is more complex than in Russia and requires addition-
al expert knowledge regarding the national decrees and laws. Moreover, higher certifi-
cation costs have to be expected. Another difference is the proceeding of the accredit-
ed test institutes. The majority of the required tests and examinations are performed
directly at the manufacturer's site. Usually, the experts must visit the company.
206
3.6 SIL - Functional Safety Standards
The standards IEC 61508 and IEC 61511 provide methods for the risk assessment of
safety-related systems. They define four safety integrity levels and describe measures
for mastering the risks of plant parts. In order to determine the SIL level of a device, all
field devices are subjected to the demanding test conditions and analyses of the IEC.
With the Council Directive 96/82/EC (Seveso II Directive) the European Union has
created the legal basis for the operation of plants with hazard potential. The German
implementation of the Directive 96/82/EC in national legislation is the Hazardous Inci-
dent Ordinance in the Federal Act for the Protection against Imissions (12th. BImSchV)
as of April 26, 2000.
By July 31, 2004, the Hazardous Incident Ordinance referred to the standards
DIN 19250 and 19251 with the requirements classes 1 - 8 for the construction of safety-
related process control equipment. Since August 1, 2004, the Hazardous Incident Or-
dinance has referred to DIN EN 61508 and DIN EN 61511 which match the contents of
the IEC 61508 / IEC 61511 standards. They define four safety integrity levels (SIL1 to
SIL4) which describe the measures to be taken for mastering the risks of plant parts
and to which the field devices and actuators must comply.
In order to be able to evaluate whether or not a device is suited for a safety chain with
specific SIL requirements, the field devices are analyzed and verified in co-operation
with an independent institution.
The hardware structure of the electronics is assessed by performing a Failure Mode,

Effect and Diagnostics Analysis (FMEDA)Considering the (electro)mechanic compo-
nents, the failure rates of a device, for example a flowmeter, can then be determined.
Basically, three parameters are calculated from the FMEDA for this purpose: the Hard-
ware Failure Tolerance (HFT), the Safe Failure Fraction (SFF) and the Probablility of
Failure on Demand (PFD).
The software development process of SIL-certified flowmeters is subject to IEC 61508

and, thus, is even beyond the requirements of IEC 61511.
Additionally, further general safety assessments of the field devices are performed. In
the SIL Declaration of Conformity provided by the manufacturer in order to support the
customer in selecting the appropriate devices for safety systems, the specified classi-
fication always refers to the lowest SIL level.
207
For the purpose of achieving safe plant operation, in another step according to the IEC
regulations the entire safety systems consisting of the sensor/transmitters, control unit
and actuator is considered and the SIL classification is made. Prior to the design and
calculation of the safety system a SIL assessment is performed for determining the
safety integrity level (e.g. SIL2) with which the safety system must comply.
ABB offers a special software which covers all aspects of plant certification from the
SIL assessment to the design and calculation of the safety systems in accordance with
IEC 61508. The software also logs and saves all decisions and calculation bases.
In daily operation of a plant, it is also necessary to check the safety systems in terms
of their safety functions on a regular basis and record the results. To achieve this, indi-
vidual test routines must be defined, executed and logged. A complex process, but a
big advantage for the health, safety and environment.
In addition to its comprehensive instrumentation portfolio, ABB also offers a special

software that manages the test routines and test results required in IEC 61508 for all
safety systems and provides them for statistics.
208
3.7 Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC
Introduction
The Council Directive for Pressure Equipment 97/23/EC (Pressure Equipment Direc-
tive, PED) belongs to a series of newly designed, harmonized EC directives intended
to remove the technical barriers to free trade within the Community. At the same time
it is a first step towards the product harmonization of pressure equipment with respect
to the design, manufacturing and conformity assessment. The observance of specific
safety requirements is of special importance.
The Council Directive 97/23/EC has been published on July 9, 1997 in the Official Jour-
nal of the European Community (OJ L181) and must be applied in all EC Member
States since 2002, after having been implemented in national legislation.
Compliance with the provisions of this EC Directive, which includes several amend-
ments with respect to the placement of pressure equipment on the market, is the re-
sponsibility of the manufacturer, confirmed by the attachment of the CE mark and the
issuance of the EC Declaration of Conformity.
Scope
The Pressure Equipment Directive applies to the placement on the market and com-
missioning of pressure equipment and assemblies thereof with a maximum allowable
pressure greater than 0.5 bar. It does not apply to the monitoring and repeated routine
checks of this equipment during operation. Pressure equipment covered by the scope
of this directive includes vessels, piping, safety accessories and pressure accessories
and assemblies consisting of pressure equipment. A list of devices that are beyond the
scope of the directive is found in the directive itself.
Essential Safety Requirements

According to the safety considerations of the Pressure Equipment Directive the obliga-
tions arising from the essential requirements listed in Annex I apply to pressure equip-
ment and assemblies where the corresponding hazard exists. The safety requirements
are compulsory. The manufacturer is under obligation to conduct a risk assessment in
order to identify the hazards which apply to his equipment on account of pressure. The
pressure equipment must be designed and constructed taking account of this analysis.
The essential requirements are to be interpreted and applied in such a way as to take
account of the state of the art and current practice at the time of design and manufac-
ture as well as of technical and economic considerations. Pressure equipment must be
designed, manufactured and checked, and if applicable equipped and installed, in such
a way as to ensure its safety when put into service in accordance with the manfuactur-
er's instructions.
As a result, measuring devices that are covered by the scope of the Pressure Equip-
ment Directive but do not meet its requirements must not be placed on the market.
209
Conformity Assessment Procedure
The conformity of a device that is covered by the scope of the Pressure Equipment Di-
rective is determined by a conformity assessment procedure using individual proce-
dure modules or a combination thereof.The selection of the modules to be used de-
pends on the product-specific or usage-specific hazard potential of the pressure
equipment.
In the Pressure Equipment Directive the pressure equipment is divided into categories
I, II, III and IV, according to the increasing hazard potential. The devices are classified
on the basis of their maximum allowable pressure (> 0.5 bar), the volume under pres-
sure (for vessels) or the nominal diameter (for pipings > DN 25), the physical state of
the measuring medium (gas, liquid, vapor) and the potential endangerment through the
measuring medium. If the pressure equipment is covered by the scope of the directive
and is also classified in one of these categories, this is already a pre-selection of the
possible minimum modules (or combinations thereof). The manufacturer may also
choose to apply one of the procedures which apply to a higher category to be able to
use a module that is more suited for his manufacturing system.
Pressure equipment that is not classified in one of the categories I - IV does not have
to meet the requirements of a specific module. Instead, it must comply with the criteria
of Good Engineering Practice (GEP) unless it is not covered by this Directive (exam-
ple: p < 0.5 bar).
The conformity assessment tables in Annex II of the directive can be used to determine
the appropriate module for the conformity assessment of the corresponding pressure
equipment.
Flowchart for the Determination of the Module
Article 1 Covered or not covered by the p > 0.5 bar ?

scope of the directive ?
Article 9 Measuring medium group ? Group 1 or Group 2
Essential safety requirements

Article 3 acc. to Annex I ? Good engineering practice, Art. 3,
Item. 3
Article 9 Category determination Tables in Annex II
Article 10 Module selection Depending on category
210
Module A
Cl. I
Internal production control
Module A1
Internal manufacturing checks with monitoring of the final assessment
Category II
Module D1
Production quality assurance
Module E1
Product quality assurance
Module D Module B1
Production quality assurance
+ EC design-examination
Module F Module B1
Category III
Product verification
+ EC design-examination
Module E Module B
Product quality assurance
+ EC type-examination
Module C1 Module B
Conformity to type
+ EC type-examination
Module H
Full quality assurance
Monitoring Through Independent Bodies

The pressure equipment of Category I is solely the responsibility of the manufacturer
in terms of the design, manufacturing and conformity assessment. If pressure equip-
ment due to the level of danger which is inherent in it is classified in a higher cate-
gory, Notified Bodies (recognized independent or manufacturer-owned inspection
body) accredited by the public authorities must be involved in the procedure to the re-
quired extent.
CE Marking and Declaration of Conformity

Pressure equipment that complies with the requirements and regulations of the Pres-
sure Equipment Directive will bear the CE marking affixed to each device, with the num-
ber of the Notified Body if applicable. Additionally, the manufacturer issues a Declara-
tion of Conformity to document the compliance of the pressure equipment with the
Pressure Equipment Directive.
211
Implementation of the Pressure Equipment Directive by ABB
ABB consistently implements the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC for its flow-
meters, among other devices, and is therefore entitled to issue the corresponding Dec-
larations of Conformity. Flowmeters are pressure accessories covered by the scope of
the Pressure Equipment Directive.
As a rule, ABB classifies its flowmeters in Category III, independently of their specific
applications. This category covers the highest potential level of danger which is possi-
ble for piping components. This ensures that the maximum safety requirements in
terms of the design, manufacturing and conformity assessment procedure are taken
into account. Flowmeters with nominal diameters DN 25 or smaller also fulfill the basic
requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive although they are not formally cov-
ered by its scope.
Classification Example
Piping DN 100, PS = 32 bar, TS = 180 C, liquid of Group 1, vapor pressure > 0.5 bar
above atmospheric pressure
PS [bar]
DN=25
DN=100
1000
100
PS
PS
D
D
N=
N=
10
350
100
0
0
DN=100
DN=350
1
PS=0.5
-0.5
0 1 10 25 100 3501000
DN
Fig. 3-12:
212
3.8 Corrosion
Corrosion is defined as the destruction of materials through chemical reactions. Gen-
erally, the concept is limited to a change of the structure of a metal caused by an aque-
ous solution. This is electrolytic corrosion for which the generation of rust is a prime ex-
ample.
Metals with their free electrons are good electrical conductors. The conductivity of cor-
rosive aqueous solutions is small, the current transport is ionic. During corrosion, a pos-
itive current flows into the liquid. This causes the positively charged metallic ions to mi-
grate into the liquid. The intensity of this process is a function of the ionic mobility and
it increases with increasing temperature and decreases with concentration increases.
Also, voltage differentials augment the corrosion. That is why the non-noble metals,
such as aluminum and iron, which are grouped at the negative end of the electromotive
series, are severely attacked. Corrosion problems can be avoided by utilizing noble
metals.
Organic chemicals, plastics, also show destructive characteristics when they come in
contact with aqueous solutions. In this case it is primarily substitution processes which
alter the material. Substitution is the replacement of an atom or atomic group by anoth-
er atom or atomic group. A material with new chemical and physical characteristics is
produced. The resistance to the solution can deteriorate. In order to evaluate the large
number of organic materials it is necessary to rely on the experiences of the manufac-
turers which are summarized in corrosion resistance tables.
The corrosion resistance table (see Chapter 8) shows how the materials used by ABB
will react when they get in contact with chemical products.
213
3.9 Data Transmission
The primary task of the transmitter connected to the flowmeter sensor is is to produce
an output signal which is proportional to the measured value and which can be used by
other secondary instruments connected to the transmitter (e.g.: indicators, recorders,
controllers). As these secondary devices are universally installed, the output signals
must be standardized.
With the advent of intelligent transmitters, electrical data systems have forged into the
forefront. For the time being, however, analog signal transmission is still preferred.
Digital technology offers appreciable advantages:

The number of electrical interconnections decreases dramatically because every out-
put does not require its own leads.
Communication is not limited to the transmission of the measuring signal. The data
exchange occurs in both directions which means that the access and setting of pa-
rameters can be effected from the outside. An error diagnosis is possible at any time.
The entire system can be expanded without great effort.
Digital signals are not affected by external interference when they are transmitted via
the communication line.
3.9.1 Standardized Pneumatic Signal

Devices and systems with a pneumatic power supply are not used very often anymore.
The reason for their decline is their limited capabilities when compared to digital tech-
nology coupled with the large expenses incurred in providing the air supply and costly
installations.
214
3.9.2 Standardized Electrical Analog Signal
The most common standardized electrical signal is a direct current of 0 to 20 mA or 4
to 20 mA. It is called an impressed direct current because it is independent of the elec-
trical resistance up to a specific maximum load. The permissible load for flowrate trans-
mitters is 750 or 1000 , respectively.
3.9.3 Switch Outputs

There are two types of switch outputs. The continuous contact is used for status signals
with which an alarm condition or the reaching of a limit value can be indicated.
In the event of a dangerous condition, e.g during a device failure or for critical mea-
sured values, an alarm is reported. The limit contact is of interest in terms of control,
since its status could indicate possible changes in the course of the process. Examples
are the empty pipe detector contact, the signal for flow direction reversal and the max./
min. conditions.
The pulse output has a completely different function. The generated pulses are signals
that are proportional to the volume and can be integrated by a totalizer. In this manner
a volume signal is generated from the flow rate. The totalizer indicates the total volume
that has flowed through the flowmeter during a specific time interval.
There are a number of methods to electrically design switch outputs. Relay contacts or
optocoupler outputs are passive. Current outputs or voltage pulse outputs are active.
215
3.9.4 HART Protocol
The worldwide standardized analog signal in the measurement industry is the 4 to
20 mA signal. Since this signal can only transmit one parameter or measured value, a
system has been developed with which additional information can be transmitted using
an alternating current signal superimposed on this current: the HART (Highway Ad-
dressable Remote Transducer) communication protocol. This digital signal, which has
become a widespread solution, allows for convenient and efficient parameterization of
intelligent measuring devices. Additionally, device-specific diagnostic data can be read
which provide information about the device's physical health and allow for predictable
maintenance. Monitoring various device parameters is also possible.
ABB's scalable device management system Asset Vision is available for easy and cost-
saving parameterization and monitoring of the measuring devices. The FDT/DTM and
EDD device management and integration technologies are supported.
The FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) procedure is the basis for the HART communication.
In this technology, the two digital values - logical 0 and logical 1 - are expressed as fre-
quencies of 1200 Hz and 2200 Hz. Because the average value of the frequency is zero,
the digital communication does not affect the analog signals.
A HART master transmits HART commands which then trigger parameter read or write
operations of an intelligent field device. In the HART standard a distinction is made be-
tween universal commands and common practice commands which must be supported
by all HART compatible device, and the manufacturer-specific commands which ad-
dress the specific parameters of the device type.
Current measurement
Digital communication
Fig. 3-13: FSK Procedure: Simultaneous Transmission of the 4 to 20 mA Signal and

Digital Communication
216
In principle, all HART devices are connected to the process control level via I/O cards,
HART multiplexers or remote I/O units (see Chapter 3.9.6). The process control level
can, thus, use the analog signal, but also the digital capabilities of the field device, for
further processing.
It is also possible to connect another HART master (for example a HART modem linked
with a notebook, a HART handheld-terminal or a PDA microcomputer) for temporary
diagnostics or for the parameterization of field devices. These devices can be connect-
ed into the 4 to 20 mA circuit at any point.
Control room Field
Supply 250
power
Field device
Modem
PC
Asset Management HART Hand Held Terminal
Fig. 3-14: Possibilities Offered by HART Communication
The HART standard has evolved, now offering a new stage with completely new pos-
sibilities for wireless transmission of HART information: WirelessHART. WirelessHART
is the first standardized wireless communication in the field of process automation.
However, as this solution does not include the connection cable, only the digital param-
eter range is available. The analog measuring signal is not provided.
But the digital wireless communication of parameter values does away with cabling
and, thus, allows for easy and cost-saving installation of additional measuring points
for diagnostic purposes. Moreover, asset management systems like, for example,
ABB's Asset Vision Professional can be run in parallel with the process control systems
without the need to change the existing cabling. Basically, there are two different Wire-
lessHART solutions:
WirelessHART Adapter for enhancing existing HART devices
Self-powered WirelessHART transmitter.
These wireless solutions use the central element of wireless HART transmission, the
WirelessHART gateway, for communication. Besides the protocol as such the standard
217
also defines various security mechanisms which ensure availability and tap-proof wire-
less signal transmission.
3.9.5 Fieldbus in Process Automation

Fieldbus systems are a communication medium for serial data exchange between de-
centralized devices of the field level and the input peripherals of the process control lev-
el. For process data acquisition in the field level not only intelligent measuring devices
and actuators with direct connections to the fieldbus are used but also intelligent re-
mote I/O units as interface systems for conventional field devices.
Only two wires suffice for transmitting all relevant signals like input and output data, pa-
rameters, diagnostic information and configuration schemes and - for additional appli-
cations - the operating energy. If a field device has a high energy demand, this device
will be supplied separately from the signal bus, i.e. a four-wire system is used instead
of a two-wire.
The use of a unique definition for the communication protocol allows the fieldbus to be
open to all field device vendors who use this protocol.In this manner it was possible to
achieve interchangeability and also use the standard 4 to 20 mA signal for the fieldbus
technology.
Besides the considerably reduced cabling effort the fieldbus technology also provides
other advantages. Every measured value is transmitted together with a status, an indi-
cator for the reliability of the value and a module of the diagnostic capabilities of field-
bus communication systems.
Standardized diagnostics and device-specific diagnostic information are available for

all devices and communication components. Additionally, the measured value have an
especially high resolution as they are purely digital. Different transmission rates and
configuration options for communication allow for perfect adaptation of the measure-
ment and transmission operations to the process requirements.
After many years of successful use in industrial applications, the fieldbus technologies
have become a powerful, reliable and cost-saving alternative to conventional installa-
tions with considerably more information.
218
The PROFIBUS Family
PROFIBUS is a vendor-independent, open, well-proven and widespread fieldbus stan-
dard for applications in production, process and building automation.
Operate
Ethernet
Engineer
Control
PROFIBUS DP
Linking
Device
PROFIBUS PA
PROFIBUS PA
PROFIBUS PA
Fig. 3-15: Example of PROFIBUS Topology
The PROFIBUS family comprises two different communication protocols and profiles
which enhance the protocol with application-specific features.
PROFIBUS DP Communication: The Bus for Decentralized Periphery

Both the PROFIBUS DP and PA profiles are of importance for process automation. The
PROFIBUS variant DP provides the communication between the process-oriented
components of a distributed control system and the decentralized peripherals in the
field. PROFIBUS DP is especially suitable for high transmission rates (up to 12 Mbit/s)
and is therefore often used in decentralized peripheral groups or externally supplied
219
field devices such as positioners or flowmeters. PROFIBUS DP/V1 additionally allows
for acyclic communication and, thus, the use of FDT/DTM or EDD tools for the param-
eterization and monitoring of devices.
PROFIBUS PA Communication: Expansions for Process Automation

PROFIBUS PA was specifically developed for use with process technology. Intrinsic
safety and supply of the field devices via the two-wire bus line are possible and comply
with the IEC 61158-2 Standard (Manchester Bus Powered MBP Physics). This vari-
ant is used for communication with two-wire supplied measuring devices and actuators
in the field. PROFIBUS PA uses an expanded form of the DP protocol. The device
properties and behavior are described by so-called profiles and defined in the standard.
Using coupler modules (segment couplers, gateways, linking devices) the PA bus lines
are integrated in the PROFIBUS DP network. This ensures that all information in the
entire PROFIBUS system (with DP and PA profile devices) is available in a consistent
network.
PROFINET
This additional communication protocol of the PROFIBUS family allowed for a success-
ful start into the age of the industrial Ethernet. The technology can be used in different
manners:
As a bus system (mainly used in production automation)
As a backbone network for heterogeneous networks with consistent basic communi-
cation (connection to different network types via a proxy server)
So far, PROFINET has not yet gained noteworthy importance in the field of process au-
tomation.
3.9.6 FOUNDATION Fieldbus

This fieldbus technology has been introduced approximately 10 years ago. It is mainly
used in America and provides two variants:
HSE - High Speed Ethernet. This variant so far has not yet been applied very of-
ten in industrial environments. Only controllers and linking devices use this proto-
col.
FF-H1. Similar to the PROFIBUS PA profile this protocol uses the MBP
(Manchester coding with Bus Powering) physics and, thus, allows for direct pow-
ering of the devices via the bus cable. A characteristic feature of H1 is the capa-
bility to allow the field devices to take over and process simple control tasks by
themselves (control in the field). This means that the network intelligence is in
parts transferred to the field level. This option requires deterministic operation of
the H1 protocol. Another typical feature of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus is the abil-
ity to transmit alarms with a time stamp.
220
3.10 Calibration and Official Verification
3.10.1 Why Calibrate?

In the company the requirement for rigorous traceability of the test equipment to nation-
al standards by calibrations to assure that everyone uses the same measurement
stick, is essential both for suppliers who manufacture the products and for users who
install these parts with other parts, due to increasing national and international division
of work and the resultant requirement for interchangeability.
In addition to the technical reasons, there are also legal aspects. The relevant direc-
tives and regulations must also be observed together with contractual obligations with
the purchaser of the products (assurance of the quality of the product) and the respon-
sibility to only bring products to the market place the safety of which is not compromised
by faults when they are used as intended. As far as contractual responsibilities for the
accuracy of the measuring devices were agreed, a nonfulfillment of these requirements
is a failure of a guaranteed property.
Proof of the selection of adequate test equipment and its proper operation within the
scope of product liability is of great importance within the framework of product liability,
because a systematic and completely documented test equipment monitoring in com-
bination with continuous proof of the adequacy of the test equipment for the task is es-
sential for a possible exoneration proof.
3.10.2 Terms and Definitions

Measuring Device
A device that is to be used for measurements, either as a stand-alone unit or together
with other equipment.
Standard (Reference)
Material measure, measuring device, reference material or measuring equipment in-
tended to represent, maintain or reproduce a unit or one or more quantity values.
Measurement
The totality of activities for determining a quantity value (represented as the product of
a numerical value and a unit, e.g. 1.23 m/h).
221
Calibration
The determination of the relationship between the specified values of a measuring de-
vice and the values specified by standards for given conditions.
Adjustment
In the context of measurement adjustment means setting or balancing a measuring de-
vice in such a way that the measuring deviation is a small as possible.
Official Verification
Verification and marking of a measuring device and/or issuing of a calibration certificate
for a measuring device to determine and confirm that the device complies with the legal
requirements. This is to certify that it can be duly expected that the values measured
by this measuring device will lie within the error limits (within the re-calibration period)
provided that the measuring device is handled in accordance with the recognized rules
of engineering.
Measurement Uncertainty
Parameter allocated to the measuring result and which specifies the spread of the
(measured) values that can reasonably be assigned to the measured variable.
Traceability
Capability of a measuring device (or the values of a standard) to be related to the ap-
propriate normals, usually international or national standards, through an uninterrupted
chain of reference measurements with the specified measuring uncertainties.
3.10.3 Methods of Flow Calibration

The commonly used measurement methods are:
Volumetric Method
Procedure to measure the volume flow rate of a liquid using a calibrated volume mea-
surement tank (bell prover) and measuring the fill time.
Gravimetric Method
This method is comparable to the volumetric method. In this case, however, the volume
of the liquid is measured by weighing, taking into account the density and the displaced
amount of air.
222
Calibrations of both methods can be conducted using either a standing START-STOP
operation (opening and closing of a shutoff device) or a flying START-STOP operation
(operation of a diverter device). Furthermore, a distinction is made between a static and
a dynamic method, whereby the latter does not require a diverter device.
Critical Nozzles
These are used as high-accuracy reference devices for the calibration of gas flows.
With this method the gas flow is accelerated to the extent that sound velocity is reached
at the smallest nozzle cross-section. The adjustment of this critical flow condition limits
the flow to a constant value.
Comparison Method (MASTER Calibration)

This is the calibration method most commonly used in industry. The calibration medium
flow through the measuring device to be calibrated and through one or more flowmeters
(masters) that have been calibrated before.
Pipe Test Section Method

The reference device is a volumetric measuring device consisting of a pipe section with
a constant cross-section and a known volume. The flow rate is derived from the time
that a plug - either driven by the fluid or propelled - needs to traverse the pipe section.
In test benches with the highest accuracy requirements mainly gravimetric methods are
used for liquid calibration, whereas methods with critical nozzles are used for gas cali-
bration.
3.10.4 Test Bench for Liquid Flow Measurement

When setting up a flow measurement test bench, for example using the gravimetric
method, various requirements per DIN EN 29104 must be met:
The flow must be stationary.
The flow in an obstruction-free inlet section must be axissymmetric and free of swirl
and pulsation.
The reference flowmeters or the calibrated test equipment for the measurement of
the flow rate or volume must meet the requirements of ISO 4185 and ISO 8316.
The flow measuring range of the reference flowmeter or the calibration standard must
be of the same size as the range of the flowmeter to be tested. The error limit of the
reference standard should not be greater than one third of the error limit of the device
to be tested.
223
The measuring equipment and the reference standard must be described in detail,
including the traceability of the reference standard and the uncertainty of the measur-
ing setup. The calculation of the uncertainty of the flow measurement must comply
with ISO 5168, ISO 7066-1 and ISO 7066-2.
The sensor must be installed between a straight, undisturbed inlet section of at least
10 x D and an undisturbed outlet section of at least 5 x D. If swirl-free velocity profiles
are required, flow straighteners must be installed.
During the measurement, the sensor must be completely filled with liquid.
Additionally, the physical characteristics of the measuring medium, for example, den-
sity and viscosity, must also be considered. Analogy calculations can be made using
the Reynolds number which takes into account different flow regimes. Naturally, the
other equipment on the test bench also have accuracies, which is so good that they
only have minimal impact on the flow rate measurement results.
1 Pump
2 Comparison standard
3 Flow straightener
4 Test meter
5 8 5 Control valve
M M M 9 6 Container
7 Weighing cells
8 Leak control Pt100
M
9 Diverter
6 10 Supply reservoir
4
M
3 Flow to tank
1 10
2 M
M Flow from tank
Fig. 3-16: Test Bench for Gravimetric Calibration and Comparison Calibration Methods
In the schematic diagram of a liquid test bench shown in Fig. 3-16 the water flows
through two comparison standards (2) which cross-check each other. The flowmeter
being calibrated (3) is installed in a long, undisturbed pipe section. The control valve
(4) and the pump (1) determine the set flow rate. The water can then either be returned
directly to the supply reservoir (8) or by actuating the diverter (7) into the tank (5), where
its mass can be measured. The scale arrangement (6) itself is calibrated in periodic in-
tervals with weights by the Office of Weights and Measures.
224
3.10.5 Test Bench for Gas Flow Measurement
Measurements for gases are for the most part realized using the differential pressure
measurement method. The simple measurement setup allows for easy design and cal-
culation of the flow measurement equipment for the specific application using standard-
ized orifice plates, nozzles or Venture tubes.
Fig. 3-17: Calibration System for Gas Flowmeters
In the ABB calibration laboratory two test benches are used which work according to
the principle of supercritically operated Laval nozzles. They work in suction mode, i.e.
air as the measuring medium is taken in under atmospheric conditions from an air-con-
ditioned calibration room. The air flow through the nozzle is increased by suction until
sound velocity is reached in the nozzle throat. The pressure condition above the nozzle
at the time when the sound velocity is reached is called the critical pressure condition.
Another pressure reduction on the suction side will not change the flow any more. A
stable flow is achieved.
Each calibration system has two test chambers, to which the test meter can be adapted
by using the appropriate inlet / outlet sections, depending on the nominal diameter. The
test chambers lead to a collecting tank, to which the inlet sections of the nozzles are
also connected. The outlet sections are flanged to a second collecting tank. The two
collecting tanks with the flanged nozzle sections are attached to a stable frame. A pip-
ing branches off the second collecting tank and leads to a blower station. In the blower
station three roots blowers are installed which also provide for the supply of the calibra-
tion system. The two test benches are largely independent of each other. The flow
ranges overlap.
225
Both systems consist of up to 10 nozzle sections representing a constant mass flow,
each. Measurement and control of the pressure conditions upstream and downstream
of the nozzles ensure that the nozzles are always operated supercritically. By means
of temperature and pressure measurements of the measuring medium upstream of
each nozzle and a calibration measurement in the calibration room the known standard
values of the nozzles are converted to the actual nozzle values under calibration con-
ditions.
A separate setup of the individual nozzle sections ensures that the nozzle do not influ-
ence each other. The feed line from the blower station, the two test chamber sections
and the individual nozzle sections can be switched using butterfly valves. The nozzle
sections can be switched individually or as a combination of up to three sections. Wit
this calibration points with small steps can be realized.
Suction
blower Data processing
P T P M
F
measurement
FQ
section
meters
Nozzle
Test
FQ
F
Fig. 3-18: Basic Test Bench Setup
226
3.10.6 Approvals of Test Benches and Products
DAkkS Accreditation
ABB has a DAkkS calibration laboratory for flow measurement. This calibration labora-
tory is accredited and monitored by Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH (DAkkS, for-
merly DKD). DAkkS has been founded by the Federal Republic of Germany, represent-
ed by the BMWi (Federal Ministry of Economics and Technology). The issued DAkkS
calibration certificates are proof of the traceability to the national standards as required
in the DIN EN ISO 9000 and DIN EN ISO 17025 series of standards. Calibrations in
DAkkS laboratories provide the user assurance of the reliability of the measurement re-
sults, increase the confidence of the customer and provide competitiveness in the na-
tional and international markets. They are the technological basis for the measurement
and test equipment monitoring within the framework of quality assurance.
In the course of globalization the international reciprocal recognition of calibration cer-

tificates is getting more and more important. Within in Europe, this is governed by a
multilateral agreement (MLA) of the European Co-operation for Accreditation (EA),
worldwide through the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC).
DAkkS calibration certificates are recognized by all signatory states of this agreement.
227
Fig. 3-19:
228
Testing of Measurement Devices for the Volume Measurement of Flowing
Liquids (Certification Approval)
Various ABB test benches have received from PTB (German National Institute of Tech-
nology and Science) the approval to calibrate approved certified measuring devices
(see next section) as well as to perform technical tests in the presence of an official
from the Office of Weights and Measures. The calibration certificates issued (without
measurement specifications, according to the calibration regulations) or test certifi-
cates MEN (with measurement specifications) are proof of the traceability to national
standards.
Type Examination Approval for Intrastate Certified Calibrations (Germany)

In order to be able to calibrate a measuring device, it is not enough to have an approved
test bench. The flowmeters themselves must also be approved by PTB for intrastate
official verification in order to certify that they comply with the requirements of the cali-
bration regulations. The Calibration Regulation EO 5 makes a distinction between dif-
ferent measuring media and evaluates them individually. For this reason, the approval
includes not only the device type, but also the nominal diameter, flow range and mea-
suring medium. ABB has received the following approvals:
Approval Range Device Type Nominal Diameter Range

Cold water/waste water 6.221 Electromagnetic DN 25...DN 2000
flowmeter
Liquids other than water 5.721 Electromagnetic
for example: flowmeter
Milk DN 25...DN 40, DN 65, DN 80
Brine DN 100...DN 150
Beer DN 25...DN 100
Wort DN 50...DN 100
Beverage concentrate DN 25
Chemical liquids DN 25...DN 150
Approved and calibrated devices can be identified by their special name plate:
Fig. 3-20: Name Plate of Measuring Device with Approval for Certified Calibration of Water/
Waste Water (Germany, only)
229
3.10.7 Calibration Possibilities at ABB
Factory Calibrations
Measured variable Volume flow rate
Measuring medium Water
Nominal diameter range DN 1...DN 2400
Measuring range1) qv = 0.2 l/min...6,000 m3/h

Measuring medium Atmospheric air
Measuring range1) qv = (2...4600) m3/h
Factory Calibrations (also Onsite Calibrations)

Measuring range1) (0.1...25) m/h
(10...1000) m/h
Measuring accuracy < 0.5 % of rate
Peculiarities pmax 16 bar
1)
Specified is the maximum range over all nominal diameters.
230
Special Calibration with Process Gas
The unique process gas measurement system is used for calibrating gas mass flow-
meters with or without explosion protection approval for combustible and non-combus-
tible gases. Gases that are corrosive to the used materials or noxious are excluded.

Measuring medium Process gas
Measuring range1) 1...700 m/h (standard condition)
Pressure range 0.5...20 bar abs.
1) Specified is the maximum range over all nominal diameters.
Fig. 3-21: Pictures of the Process Gas System
231
Certified/Special Calibrations MEN
Measuring range1) qv = max. 6000 m3/h
DKD Calibrations
Measured variable Volume/mass flow
Volume/mass of flowing liquids
Nominal diameter range DN 50...DN 600, DN 800
Measuring range1) qv = 5...3000 m3/h V = 1.5...60.0 m3
qm = 5...3000 t/h m = 1.5...60.0 t
Smallest specifyable 0.15 % 0.1 %
meas. error2)
Meas. inputs Current 0/4...20 mA
Frequency 0...10 kHz
Measured variable Volume/mass flow

Volume/mass of flowing gases
Measuring range qv = 0.8...1000 m3/h qv = 1000...7300 m3/h
m = 1...1200 t/h m = 1200...8800 kg/h
Smallest specifyable 0.3 % 0.4 %
measuring error
1)
Specified is the maximum range over all nominal diameters.
2) The smallest specifyable measuring error is defined in acc. with DKD-3 (EA-4/02). These are extended
measuring errors with a coverage probability of 95 % and an extension factor k = 2.
Measuring errors without units are relative values related to the measured value.
232
3.10.8 Measuring Instruments Directive (MID)
The Measuring Instruments Directive MID is a European directive that describes the
prerequisites for placing on the market and putting in use measuring devices for legal
metrology (calibration) The directive was adopted by the European Parliament and in-
corporated by the Member States of the European Union into national legislation. In
Germany this resulted in the amendment of the already existing Verification Act.
Due to the harmonized standards in Europe, an approval is recognized in all Member

States of the EU. The requirements in terms of the device technology are only roughly
outlined in the MID, in order not to enforce technological restrictions. For detailed infor-
mation please refer to the recommendations of the OIML (Organisation Internationale
de Mtrologie Lgale).
For the conformity assessment different module combinations are possible:

Manufacturer Conformity Assessment
Production Modules B + F Modules B + D Module G (not for Module H1
Phases Water Meters)
Development
Design Design
Type Type Examination Type Examination Examination
(B) (B)
Series Unit Verification
Production Quality Assurance
of Full Quality
Product Verfication Production Assurance
(F) Process (D)
Final Product
Declaration of Conformity and CE Marking
Tab. 3-10: Overview of Module Combinations
MID Chronology and Transitional Period

The MID was adopted by the European Parliament in 2004 and had to be incorporated
into national legislation within two years (by October 30, 2006, at the latest).
Type examination approvals issued before this date will be recognized for re-calibration
for up to ten years after this deadline (i.e. until October 29, 2016).
233
3.10.9 OIML (Organisation Internationale de Mtrologie Lgale)
The OIML is the International Organization for Legal Metrology having seat in Paris,
France. It has already been existing for many years and has published various recom-
mendations and documents for the worldwide standardization of the legal metrology.
The OIML has a close cooperation with the PTB (German National Institute of Technol-
ogy and Science).
OIML Recommendation R49 is valid for cold water meters, whereas flowmeters for liq-
uids other than water fall under OIML Recommendation R117.
OIML R49 - Flowmeters for Cold Water

This directive describes the technical requirements on the device, the prerequisites for
approval and the tests to be performed (type examinations and routine tests). These
include, for example:
Accuracy classes (1 % and 2 %)
Measuring ranges in fixed steps
Flow ranges Q1 to Q4 (minimum flow to overload flow)
Flow measurement points, mounting position, inlet/outlet sections
Volume indication
Functional tests of devices with electronic equipment (e.g. EMC, vibration, tem-
perature)
OIML R117 - Flow Measurement of Liquids other than Water

This directive describes the technical requirements on the flowmeter and the entire
measuring system, the prerequisites for approval and the tests to be performed (type
examinations and routine tests). These include, for example:
Various accuracy classes, depending on the measuring medium and application
Measuring ranges in fixed steps
Flow ranges Qmin to Qmax, with fixed ratio
Flow measurement points, mounting position, inlet/outlet sections
Indication of volume flow and mass flow (conversion requires special approval
procedure)
Functional tests of devices with electronic equipment (e.g. EMC, vibration, tem-
perature)
Suitability of the entire measuring system (e.g. pump, filter, gas separator)
234
4 Device Selection Criteria
By comparing the individual characteristics of volume totalizers and flowmeters, which
must be considered from different points of view, this section of the manual attempts to
compile the most interesting aspects for instrument selection in order to provide a guide
to the user. The various criteria are assembled in tables so that the applicability may
be readily ascertained for a particular situation.
Naturally it is not possible within the framework of this publication to be all encompass-
ing.There are always special designs for individual applications, and the sizes and val-
ues listed here are merely snapshots representing the current state of the art. They will
certainly be updated as technology continues to evolve.
Unfortunately, the initial cost is often the essential selection criterion. Lifecycle costs,
for example for the preparation of the installation site, installation and maintenance, are
often considered as being of low priority or neglected for the most part. Additionally per-
haps, considerations in terms of the long-term stability may play an important role in
device selection. The following comparison is intended to provide assistance in this
regard.
235
4.1 Flowmeters for Closed Pipings
Flow charts for device selection with a number of important selection criteria
Measuring medium
no
Liquid state 1
yes
no
Solids content 2
yes
With solids
236
1
Gas
Chemically yes
aggressive
Material
no selection
In addition to totalizer, no
is flow measurement required?
yes
Inlet/outlet yes Inlet/outlet

section section
Turbine
no no
Diff. pressure
Lobed impeller
gas totalizer
VFM
SFM Thermal mass
VAF
SFM Swirl flowmeter

Coriolis mass VAF Variable area flowmeter
VFM Vortex flowmeter
237
2
SFM Swirl flowmeter
EMF Electromagnetic flowmeter
VAF Variable area flowmeter
Fluid clean UFM Ultrasonic flowmeter
VFM Vortex flowmeter
Chemically yes
aggressive
no Material
selection
Con- no
ductive
yes
In addition
to totalizer, is flow no
measurement
In addition required?
no to totalizer, is flow
measurement
required? yes
yes
Inlet/outlet no Inlet/outlet no
section Oval section
SFM
gear
yes yes
Oscil.
piston Turbine VAF
Wolt- Rotary VFM Coriolis

man vane mass
UFM
Inlet/outlet no Inlet/outlet no
section section Oval
SFM
gear
yes yes
Oscil.
Turbine VAF
piston
Wolt- Rotary
VFM EMF man vane
Coriolis
UFM mass
238
3
Liquid
with solids
Mild yes
contamination
no Mild
contamination
Solids
transport
Chemically yes
aggressive
Chemically yes Material
aggressive no
selection
no Material
selection
no
Conductive
Conductive yes
Totalization
and flow measurement
yes
Totalization
Totalization
Inlet/outlet no
section Rotary
vane
yes
VFM Coriolis
mass
Inlet/outlet no Wolt-
section man
Vane
yes
VFM Coriolis
mass
Inlet/outlet no Wolt-
EMF
section man
EMF
239
4.1.1 Influences of the Measuring Medium Properties
In the first place is the measuring medium itself. Its volume and flow rate are to be de-
termined. Before the appropriate device type can be selected, the type of the medium
to be measured and its properties have to be analyzed. This represents an appreciable
portion of the meter sizing effort.
Measuring Aggre- Upper Solids in Measuring Electrical Gas Changes Chemically

Medium gate Viscosity Medium Conduct- Content of Aggressive
State Limit ivity in Pressure, Measuring
[mPas] Mild Con- Solids Liquid Density, Medium, Risk
tamina- Transport Tempe- of Corrosion
tion rature
Oval Gear L 1 105 u n Error Housing and
Totalizer gears of stainl.
steel, carbon
bearing
Oscillating L 2 104 u n Error Stainless steel
Piston housing
Direct
Totalizer PTFE piston,

carbon bearing,
Increased PTFE bearing
Lobed G No wear, u n Cast steel
Impeller effect housing
Volume Totalizer
Totalizer Risk alumin., steel

of Minor cast piston,
blockage error oil seal
Rotary L 5 u n Error Plastic
Vane parts,
Totalizer brass
housing
Woltman L 3 u n Error Cast
Totalizer housing,
Indirect
plastic
rotary vane,
parts of
stainless steel
Turbine L (G) 700 u u n Risk Nickel rotor,
Totalizer of housing and
over other parts of
speed stainless steel
n = no effect
u = unsuitable
L = Liquid
G = Gas
S = Steam
Tab. 4-1: Effect of the Measuring Medium Properties
240
Measuring Aggregate Upper Solids in Meas. Medium Electr. Gas Changes Chemically
Medium State Viscosity Con- Content of Aggressive
Limit Mild Contami- Solids duct- in Pressure, Measuring
[mPas] nation Trans- ivity Liquid Density, Medium, Risk
port Tempe- of Corrosion
rature
Vortex L, G, S 7.5 Essentially u n Cavitat- Gas mea- Stainless steel
Flowmeter insensitive to ion surement (Hastelloy)
contamination effects affected,
Swirl L, G, S 30 u n possible liquid Stainless steel
Flowmeter (indep. of measure- (Hastelloy)
nominal ment
diameter) unaffected
Differential L, G, S see Damage to me- u n Error Effect Stainless steel
Pressure Table tering edge, on p
Measurement 2.4 plugging of
pressure
tap connector
Variable L, G, S 100 Damage u n Error Density Stainless steel
Area (700) to changes Hastelloy,
Flowmeter
Flowmeter metering edge buoyancy PTFE, glass

Electro- L No n n 0.5 Error n PTFE, PFA,
magnetic effect s/cm platinum
Flowmeter
Ultrasonic L (G) Re- Only allowed for u n Error for Sound Stainless steel,
Flowmeter effect Doppler, Doppler, velocity PTFE
damping for damping changes for
transit time for transit Doppler
time
Mass L (G) No Possible with u n Error Density is Stainl. steel
Flowmeter, effect restrictions measured Hastelloy
Coriolis variable
Mass G No Essentially u n n Stainl. steel,
Flowmeter, effect insensitive Hastelloy,
Thermal to con- ceramic
tamination
n = no effect
u = unsuitable
L = Liquid
G = Gas
S = Steam
Tab. 4-2: Effect of the Measuring Medium Properties
241
Viscosity Effects
Viscosity is a property of the measuring medium. Through use of the Reynolds number
it is possible to coordinate the viscosity effects and the dimensions of the measuring
point. For Re < 2300 laminar flow exists with a large viscosity effect. The transition re-
gion exists between approximately 2300 < Re < 3000 above which turbulence exists.
In the turbulent region there are no limitations due to viscosity. Small Re values have
varying effects, depending on the measuring method.
For gas totalization or flow measurement the viscosity effect is hardly noticeable. Only
for small variable area flowmeters with light-weight floats does the effect increase
slightly in the lower measuring ranges.
The situation for liquids is quite different. Completely viscosity-independent are the
electromagnetic flowmeters and the mass flowmeters, although the pressure drop in
the latter is affected as a function of the length of the measuring section. Ultrasonic
flowmeters have difficulties in the transition region from laminar to turbulent flow.
In Vortex, swirl and turbine flowmeters an increasing viscosity raises the lower range
value, thus reducing the span.
Oval gear and oscillating piston meters are ideal devices for high viscosities. At higher
viscosity they become more accurate because of the decrease in gap losses.
A special float design helps to minimize the effects of viscosity in flowmeters of this
type.
Solids in the Measuring Medium

The presence of solids in the medium has various effects. First there is the usually un-
desirable contamination,then there are mixtures such as pastes and slurries, and finally
there is the hydraulic transport of solids. Contamination is undesirable because its
amount and effects are difficult to predict. Gases can convey liquids or dust particles.
Solid particles in a gas are dangerous because the gas flow velocities are high and
therefore the kinetic energy of the particles can be appreciable, so that they may be-
come destructive or cause deposits .
The lobed impeller gas totalizer requires that the gases is filtered. In the startup phase
a screen with 0.1 to 0.2 mm of mesh is recommended. Additionally, a flushing system
can be used to remove dirt. In differential pressure and variable area flowmeters dust
particles may damage the highly sensitive metering edges.
Unclean liquids may cause a higher wear of rotary totalizers. In the worst case the ro-
tating parts may become stuck. Vortex and swirl flowmeters flush minor contamination
through the meter.
242
If a non-conducting coating (oil, grease) in an electromagnetic flowmeter isolates the
electrically coupled electrodes from the liquid, then a meter with capacitively coupled
electrodes must be installed. A conductive coating, e.g. from magnetite, only results in
measuring error when the medium (in this case water) has a conductivity of less than
100 S/cm. Otherwise, the electromagnetic flowmeters is the least affected meter.
A special case is the ultrasonic flowmeter, because the Doppler principle requires some
foreign bodies as reflectors. The transit time principle can only tolerate a minor amount
of dirt particles and will not operate if gas bubbles are present. Deposits affect the
sound path and cause measuring errors.
A prerequisite for proper functioning of the mass flowmeter is that the solid particles fol-
low the vibrations, which again is a function of the fluid viscosity. Therefore, with an in-
creasing mass and inertia of the particle the risk of incorrect measurements increases.
Hydraulic Solids Transport

For hydraulic solids transport, e.g. for coal or dredging slurries, a piping system without
any constrictions or obstructions is required. Increased abrasion is also always
present. The flow measurement in sections of this kind is only possible with electro-
magnetic flowmeters. The abrasion effect can be minimized by selecting the appropri-
ate materials for the liner (ceramic carbide, PU, soft rubber) and electrodes (Hastelloy).
The mass flow rate of the moving solids is generally the variable which is desired for
hydraulic solids transport. Therefore a density meter (radioisotope density meter) and
a volume flowmeter are combined and the mass flow rate is calculated from the product
of the two values.
Deposits
Undesirable deposits in the pipings are removed with scrapers. The effectiveness of
the scraper requires, among other things, a constant inside diameter along the entire
length of the piping. The flowmeter installed in the piping is of course subjected to the
same requirements, i.e., matching of the inside diameter without steps. Only electro-
magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters can be individually adapted. Multipipe mass flow-
meters cannot be scraped at all.
Gas Content in a Liquid

The devices used for the flow measurement of liquids are volume flowmeters that are
not capable of differentiating between a gas and a liquid. For this reason, gaseous com-
ponents in a liquid cause errors the magnitude of which is equal to the proportion of gas
in the mixture. A correct measurement can be expected to be obtained with a Coriolis
mass flowmeter. But here also errors occur because of the damping characteristics of
the gases.
243
Beyond these there are some side effects which must also be considered. For turbine
flowmeters it might happen that larger gas bubbles could cause over speeding. Cavi-
tation is readily generated at higher flow velocities particularly in Vortex and swirl flow-
meters. In the Ultrasonic flowmeters using the transit time principle both the transit time
and the damping are changed so that even small gas bubbles can cause an effect. Er-
rors are noted with as little as a 0.2% volume of gas.
Risk of Corrosion due to Aggressive Measuring Media

The effects of corrosion can only be avoided by proper material selection. A slight inat-
tention, for example, in selecting the material for a gasket can result in an inoperative
measuring device.
The complicated elements of volume totalizers are disadvantaged when it comes to

material selections. Therefore, these meters are not favored for applications with cor-
rosive media. Rotary vane and Woltman meters are preferred for water measurements.
The flowmeters offer a variety material choices. For differential pressure flowmeters it
is important to consider that not only the orifice must be corrosion resistant, but also
the pressure lines and fittings. In certain installations an isolating fluid or gas is injected
into the pressure line in order to prevent the entry of dangerous fluids.
Variable area flowmeters made of special materials are expensive and, therefore, rare-
ly deployed. The same holds true for the mass flowmeters.
Suitable solutions to the problems are offered only by the electromagnetic and ultra-
sonic flowmeters. The smooth meter tube can be coated with a corrosion resistant liner
such as PTFE, for example. Ultrasonic probes in ultrasonic flowmeters and electrodes
in electromagnetic flowmeters are process-wetted, i.e. they extend through the pipe or
liner and are, thus, in direct contact with the measuring medium. The ultrasonic probe
can be protected with a stainless steel or Hastelloy coating. There are better alterna-
tives available in the electromagnetic flowmeters. A wide variety of electrode materials
are available, ranging from stainless steel over Monel, Titanium, Hastelloy and Plati-
num to Carbon.
4.1.2 Flow Regime Effects

The measuring medium flowing through the piping has characteristics which effect the
flow regimes, particularly in combination with the pipeline configuration. On the other
hand, the measuring devices only have a limited ability to process these effects without
errors. In other words, there are limitations which are characterized by the velocity pro-
file and the Reynolds number.
244
The ideal condition is flow with a turbulent axissymmetric flow profile. The two-dimen-
sional velocity profile shown in Fig. 1-2 should be considered in three dimensions. All
devices operate correctly. Similarly most devices operate correctly with axisymmetric
laminar flow profiles with the restriction that the spans of the indirect volume totalizers,
the differential pressure and variable area flowmeters decrease with increasing
viscosity.
The least affected by flow profile irregularities are the direct volume totalizers. And for
measuring media with lower Reynolds numbers they are the most accurate.
Flow Regime Steadying Section

Laminar Transi- Turbu- Inlet Outlet Shock Type
tion lent Operation
Oval Gear n n n n n Wear
Totalizer
Direct
Oscillating Piston n n n n n Wear

Totalizer
Lobed Impeller n n n n n Risk of
Totalizer resonance
Rotary Vane n n n n n n
Totalizer
Indirect Volume Totalizer
Woltman Totalizer n n n 5xD 3xD n
Turbine Flowmeter n n n 15 x D 5xD Over speed,

wear
Vortex Flowmeter n 15...25 x D 5xD n
Swirl Flowmeter n 3xD 1xD n
Differential Pressure n n n Tab. 2.5 Tab. 2.5 Error

Measurement
Variable Area n n n n n Error
Flowmeter
Electromagnetic n n n 3xD 2xD n
Flowmeter
Flowmeter
Ultrasonic n n Same as 5xD n

Flowmeter orifices,
Tab. 2.5
Coriolis Mass n n n n n Error
Flowmeter
Thermal Mass n n n 15 x D 5xD n
Flowmeter
n = no effect;
= unsuitable
1 x D = inlet/outlet section of 1 x D in length
Tab. 4-3: Flow Regime Effects
245
Type of disturbance Velocity profile (turbulent)
Concentric
reducer
Concentric
square edge
reducer Axisymmetric
Concentric
expander
Concentric
square edge
expander
Eccentric
gate
90 elbow
Non-
axisymmetric
Tee
Two 90 elbows
in different
planes
Rotation
Eccentric
side entry Swirl
Tab. 4-4: Velocity Profiles in Piping 12 x D After the Disturbance with Turbulent Flow
246
Disturbed flow profiles in turbulent flows must be considered independently of the de-
vice type. Tab. 4-4 shows a number of examples of disturbances and their influence on
the velocity profile cross sections. Direct volume totalizers have no difficulty with such
changes. The same holds true for variable area and Coriolis mass flowmeters as well
as for swirl flowmeters.
The differential pressure flowmeters are very sensitive to disturbances. Long, distur-
bance-free straight pipe sections should provide for equilibration (Tab. 2-4). The ultra-
sonic flowmeter is affected when its very narrow sound beam does not sense all the
velocity differences, which is very seldom the case. Therefore, requirements similar to
those for the differential pressure flowmeters are valid. The two or more beam ultrason-
ic flowmeters are better suited for such conditions.
Axissymmetric flow profiles are good-natured disturbances that lose their effects after
even short inlet sections. The step changes can, however, carry along wall vortices. In-
direct totalizers, electromagnetic flowmeters and mass flowmeters do not encounter
any problems.
The situation is quite different with non-symmetric profiles. Direct volume totalizers re-
quire an inlet section of 10...15 x D (inlet and outlet sections are straight pipe sections
that have the same diameter as the measuring device; flow straighteners provide a
means for shortening the required section length), whereas electromagnetic flowme-
ters demand only sections of 3...5 x D. Swirl and transverse vortices persist in straight
sections over long distances. Since their effects on the measuring accuracy are appre-
ciable, flow straighteners must be used to eliminate their effects.
The inlet sections listed in Tab. 4-3 should be installed upstream of the meters. Addi-
tional outlet sections should be provided to prevent feedback from disturbances down-
stream of the sensor. Their lengths are between 3 x D and 10 x D.
247
4.1.3 Ranges of Application and Technical Limit Values
The installation site mus also be taken into account in the selection of the meter be-
cause the ambient conditions can only be adjusted to a limited degree to the require-
ments of the particular flowmeter.
If, for example, solids are to be transported hydraulically, oscillating piston meters are
not suitable. The same is valid for electromagnetic flowmeters that are unusable for gas
flow measurement, as gases are not electrically conductive.
Tab. 4-5 shows a number of criteria which may be given by the measuring point. The
specifications in the tables are taken from manufacturers' publications. There are cer-
tainly device variants with specifications and limits beyond the limits listed in the table.
Nominal Mounting Max. Highest Vibra- Pulsation Response Power

Diameter Position Perm. Pres- tion to Supply
DN Meas. sure Reverse
Point Rating flow
Temp. PN
Oval Gear 6...400 Horizontal 300 C 100
Totalizer Minor
effect Not
Direct
Oscillating Piston 15...800 Any 300 C 100 required,

Totalizer Reverse only for
Lobed Impeller 40...300 Horizontal 40 C 25 Strong Total- conversion
Volume Totalizer
Totalizer Increased effect izing and mea-

wear sured value
Rotary Vane 15...50 Horizontal 130 C 16 transmission
Totalizer (vertical)
Woltman 40...400 Horizontal 130 C 40 Effect
Indirect
Turbine 5...600 Horizontal 250 C 100

Vortex 15...300 Any 400 C 100 Effect*) For
Flowmeter Little No supply of
effect defined the
Swirl Flowmeter 15...400 Any 280 C 100 Effect*)
measure- transmitters
Differential <50...2000 Any 1000 C 630 Little Little ment
Pressure effect effect
Measurement
Variable Area 3...100 Vertical 360 C 250 Strong Strong Same as
Flowmeter effect effect totalizers
Electromagnetic 1...3000 Any 180 C 250 No Compl.
Flowmeter effect meas. for re-
Flowmeter
No verse flow
effect
Ultrasonic 10...3000 Any 200 C 100 Minor Measure-
Flowmeter effect ment Required
possible
Coriolis Mass 1.5...150 Any 200 C 100 No Insignifi- Compl.
Flowmeters effect cant meas. for re-
effect verse flow
Thermal 25...3000 Any 300 C 40 No Little Measure-
Mass Flowmeter effect effect ment
possible
*) Compensation for swirl and Vortex flowmeters
Tab. 4-5: Fields of Application
248
Pressure and Temperature
Housing strength due to its wall thickness and material selection, mechanical toleranc-
es for temperature expansion, gasket type and material, sensors limits and the effects
on the transmitting element; these are some of the considerations that have an effect
on the device selection for high temperatures and pressures. For variable area flowme-
ters a distinction is made between devices with glass tube and those with a metal tube.
The pressure and temperature limitations for glass tube meters naturally lie far below
those for metal tube meters.
Differential pressure flowmeter selection includes the fittings, pressure lines and trans-
mitters. These parts must be designed appropriately. The limiting values for the trans-
mitter are decisive for the entire system. As the maximum temperature limit for trans-
mitters is usually around 120 C, higher temperatures must be reduced accordingly by
isolators in the pressure line.
Vibration
Piping vibrations primarily cause wear on the moving parts and bearings in volume to-
talizers. In the oscillating elements in Vortex and mass flowmeters, the vibration fre-
quencies are superimposed on the measurement frequencies, thus causing errors. If
resonance occurs, parts may fracture. The ABB Vortex flowmeter is substantially in-
sensitive to vibrations because of the separation of the sensor from the
bluff body and the oscillation compensation in the sensor.
Because of its S-shape double tube design the CoriolisMaster mass flowmeter mea-
sures differential signals which are essentially decoupled from external vibrations. Ad-
ditionally, the digital filter technology assures wide insensitivity to external vibrations.
Should the vibrations be the same as the excitation frequency, then the measurements
could be affected.
The relatively large mass of its float makes the device sensitive to vibrations. Therefore,
snubbers should be used and the devices should be fixed to the wall.
Pulsation
Pulsation effects are a function of the inertia of the measuring system. Only when the
measuring element can follow the pulsations without lag will the measurement be un-
affected.
Measuring devices with moving parts are, thus, subjected to increased wear. There-
fore, it is essential to use the appropriate snubbers. Oval gear and oscillating piston
meters have so much inertia that that they provide a degree of self damping sufficient
for averaging purposes. The measuring error will slightly increase.
249
In Chapter 2.1.3 the dangerous effect of pulsation on lobed impeller totalizers has al-
ready been described. Turbine, vortex and swirl flowmeters measure the flow essen-
tially without inertia, but they include time constant elements in the connected transmit-
ters. Again the average is obtained with slightly larger errors. Gas turbine flowmeters
are in danger when the rotational speed increases too quickly resulting in more bearing
wear if over speeding occurs.
As a result of the nonlinear relationship between the flow rate and the differential pres-
sure, the error in differential pressure flowmeters caused by pulsation also changes
nonlinearly. Therefore, a damping device is definitely recommended, preferably using
storage volumes or expansion tanks in the measuring medium line. The Hodgson num-
ber can be used to calculate the required volumes. The damping elements in differen-
tial pressure transmitters compensate for small pulsations.
The float of a variable area flowmeter tends to dance when pulsations are present.
Therefore, damping elements must also be used here. Metal cone variable area flow-
meters can be equipped with the appropriate damping elements.
Reverse Flow Measurement

An extreme form of pulsation can lead to reverse flow. On the other hand, many pipings
are specifically designed and used for bidirectional flow. Are there flowmeters which
can also measure reverse flow?
Direct volume totalizers can naturally reverse their direction and totalize backwards
when their secondary sides include appropriate provisions. The best solutions are pro-
vided by the electromagnetic and mass flowmeters which provide all measurements
for both flow directions and can switch automatically.
Power Supply
Measurement and control technology operates with measurement signals which must
be transmitted over long distances. Therefore, all totalizers and flowmeters provide ap-
propriate output signals the generation of which requires electrical power. The flowme-
ters additionally require power supply for their operation.
When only local indication is needed, totalizers and variable area flowmeters do not re-
quire electrical supply cables.
In very few cases 0.2 to 1 bar pneumatic standard signals are used. For this purpose
the measuring devices must be equipped with the corresponding transmitters the pow-
er of which is provided by a compressed air supply of 1.4 bar. Pneumatic transmitters
are found in differential pressure and variable area flowmeters.
250
Grounding the Electromagnetic Flowmeters
Grounding per VDE 0100 is not only required because of safety considerations but also
to assure proper operation of the flowmeter sensor. The signals measured at the elec-
trodes are only a few millivolts in amplitude and can be affected by stray ground
currents which may flow through the flowmeter or measuring path and may exceed a
tolerable degree. To comply with VDE 0100, Part 540, the sensors' grounding screws
must be connected to functional ground (for explosion-proof designs per VDE 0165 to
a potential equalization bonding conductor). For measurement reasons the ground po-
tential and the signal potential of the measuring medium should be identical, if possible.
No additional grounding via the terminals (power supply) is required. Plastic pipes or
pipes with insulated liner are grounded by using a grounding plate or grounding elec-
trodes. If the piping section is not free of stray currents, it is recommended that a
grounding plate be installed on each side, i.e. upstream and downstream of the flow-
meter.
Grounding electrodes are used when price considerations are decisive and no stray
currents are present. It should be noted that not all device variants can be specified with
grounding electrodes.
One grounding plate is installed when plastic or insulated pipings are used and for de-
vice designs, which are not available with grounding electrodes.
Two grounding plates are installed for insulated pipings when stray potentials may exist
in the piping. This is also true when cathodic protection is used and the flowmeter sen-
sor is to be installed electrically insulated in the piping so that the cathodic potential can
be shunted around the sensor.
251
4.1.4 Performance Specifications and Properties of the Flowmeters
Span Measuring Error Pressure Drop
in % of Rate at qvmax [bar]
Volume Totalizers
Oval Gear 1:2...1:10 0.1...0.3 4

Totalizer
Oscillating Piston 1:5...1:250 0.2...2 3
Direct
Totalizer
Lobed Impeller 1:20 (1:50) 1 0,03
Totalizer
Rotary Vane 1:100...1:350 2...3 0.25...0.75

Totalizer
Volume Totalizers
Woltman 1:100...1:12500 2...3 0.005...0.5

Totalizer
Indirect
Turbine 1:5...1:20 0.5 (liquid) 0.5...1

Totalizer 1 (gas)
Vortex 1:15...1:20 0.75 (liquid) 0.9 (water)
Flowmeter 1 (gas) 0.06 (air)
Swirl 1:15...1:25 0.5 0.7 (water)
Flowmeter 0.07 (air)
Differential Pressure 1:5 (1:10) 2 0.005...1 depending on
Measurement differential pressure and
area ratio
Variable Area 1:12 Class 1.6/2.5/6 0.005...0.2
Flowmeter
Flowmeters
Electromagnetic 1:50 0.2 Same as piping

Flowmeter
Ultrasonic 1:10 1 Same as piping
Flowmeter
Coriolis Mass 1:100 0.1 0.5...2
Flowmeter
Thermal Mass 1:40...1:150 1 0.002
Flowmeter
Tab. 4-6: Performance Specifications
252
Moving Wear, Material Selection for Clean-
Parts Wear Process-Wetted Parts ing
Parts Sterili-
zation
Oval Gear Oval Bearing, Oval gears and housing of gray
Totalizer gears, gear teeth cast iron, stainless steel,
gear train bronze, bearings of hard
Volume Totalizers
carbon, stainless steel

Oscillating Piston Oscillating Bearing, Housing and meas. chamber of +
Totalizer piston, oscillating gray cast iron, stainless steel,
Direct
gear train piston bronze, thermosets, oscillating

pistons of gray cast iron, hard
rubber, carbon, PCTFE, Tanta-
lum, plastic
Lobed Impeller Lobed Bearing, Impellers and housing of alu-
Totalizer impeller, lobed minium alloy or gray cast iron,
gear train impeller bearings of stainless steel
Rotary Vane Rotary Bearing Housing of brass, measuring
Totalizer vane, inset of plastic, axles of stain-
gear train less steel
Woltman Rotary Bearing Housing of gray cast iron or
Totalizer vane, spheroidal graphite iron, vane
Volume Totalizers
gear train and measuring inset of plastic,

brass, stainless steel
Indirect
Turbine Rotor Bearing Rotor and housing of

Totalizer stainless steel, bearing of
sapphire, tungsten carbide
Vortex None Stainless steel, optionally Vor- +
Flowmeter tex element, sensor and com-
Insignificant plete housing of Hastelloy C
Swirl None Wear Stainless steel, optionally inlet +
Flowmeter and outlet body, sensor and
complete housing of
Hastelloy C
Differential None Metering Stainless steel 1.4571
Pressure edges
Measurement
Variable Area Float Metering Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastel- +
Flowmeter edges loy C, PTFE, PVDF, glass
Electromagnetic None Liner of hard or soft rubber, ++
Flowmeter
Flowmeter PFA, PTFE, electrodes of

stainless steel 1.4571, Hastel-
loy, tantalum, platinum
Ultrasonic None Insignificant Stainless steel 1.4571, ++
Flowmeter wear Hastelloy C
Coriolis Mass None Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastel- ++
Flowmeters loy C, stainless steel 1.4435
Thermal None Stainless steel, Hastelloy C, ++
Mass Flowmeter ceramic
Tab. 4-7: Performance Specifications (Continued)
253
Measured Value Indication and Transmission
Local Limit Cur- Two- Pulse Inter- HART Expl. Certif.
Indi- Contact rent Wire face Prot Approval
cator Output
Oval Gear yes yes n n yes n n Not Liquids
Volume Totalizers
Totalizer requ.
Oscillating Piston yes n n n yes n n Not Liquids
Direct
Totalizer (Ex) requ.
Lobed Impeller yes yes n n yes n n Not Gases

Totalizer requ.
Rotary Vane yes n n n yes n n Not Water

Totalizer requ.
Volume Totalizers
Woltman yes n n n yes n n Not Water

Totalizer requ.
Indirect
Turbine n n n n yes n n yes Liquids,

Totalizer gases
Vortex yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes n
Flowmeter
Swirl yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes n
Flowmeter
Differential yes n yes yes n yes yes yes n
Pressure
Measurement
Variable Area yes yes yes yes yes n yes yes n
Flowmeter
Flowmeter
Electromagnetic yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Water,
Flowmeter food,
chemicals
Ultrasonic yes n yes yes yes yes yes yes Heating
Flowmeter water
Coriolis Mass yes yes yes n yes yes yes yes yes
Flowmeter
Thermal Mass yes yes yes n yes yes yes yes n
Flowmeter
Tab. 4-8: Performance Specifications (Continued)
254
Span
The spans for oval gear and oscillating piston meters are a function of the viscosity of
the measuring medium. They are 1 : 10 for viscosities up to approx. 300 mPas and in-
crease to 1:20 for viscosities of 1 104 mPas. The conditions are exactly the opposite
for indirect totalizers and flowmeters. With increasing viscosity the linear lower range
value increases and reduces the span.
Because of the square root relationship which exists in the differential pressure mea-
surement between the measured variable, the differential pressure and the flow rate,
the span depends on the required measuring accuracy. A span of 1:3 promises a very
high measuring accuracy.
Electromagnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters represent a special situation in that their up-
per range values can be set and, thus, optimized. Thermal mass flowmeters (gas mea-
surement) achieve spans up to 1:150.
Error Limits
The error limits represent controversial specifications, because they are values pub-
lished by the manufacturers for ideal boundary conditions. In practice deviations from
the ideal conditions are common, so that additional stipulations must be made for the
instrument accuracies. It is important to realize that the accuracy may be based on the
currently measured value (% of rate) or on the upper range value (% of max.). In the
VDI/VDE Directive 2600 (4) the types of errors, reference values, and error conditions
are defined.Through special calibrations better accuracies can be achieved, which are
generally valid only for a specific time period. Generally speaking, the error limits can
be affected by contamination, wear and physical changes.
The values listed in the table are based on the currently measured values [% of rate].An
exception is made for the specifications regarding the variable area flowmeters, since
in VDI/VDE 3513 Sheet 2 a classification class system is defined which is based on a
combination or errors related to either the rate or the upper range value. 75% of the of
the error values for an accuracy class are percent of rate values and the other 25% are
percent of max. values.
The sum of the two values yields the accuracy class: 1 - 2.6 - 2.5 - 4 - 6 - 10.
The accuracy is defined by two parameters, G and qG: Error limit G: Constantly per-
missible error in % of rate that is valid above the linearity limit qG. Linearity limit qG:
Flow limit in % of the max. value, above which the permissible relative error is constant.
Below the linearity limit the permissible measuring error increases with decreasing
measured value in inverse ratio.
255
Wear
Understandably, long-term reliability of the measurement is one of the major user re-
quirements. Therefore, the mechanical wear must be kept to a minimum.
Wear is caused primarily by abrasion of the metering elements (through the measuring
medium) and by the bearing friction of the moving parts. Electromagnetic flowmeter can
be considered to be ideal because the smooth inside wall only shows wear when highly
abrasive media are measured such as lime slurries, sand-water mixtures, or coal-water
mixtures in hydraulic solids transport. If the walls are lined with polyurethane or soft rub-
ber then even these measuring media rarely cause difficulties.
Even though Vortex and swirl flowmeters have no moving parts, they do have parts
which extend into the measuring section. A specific size, hardness and edge sharp-
ness of solid particles in the measuring medium must not be exceeded. A low dust con-
tent in gases or plastic suspensions, however, is permissible.
In orifice metering the metering edge must remain sharp because, otherwise, even mi-
nor changes may cause measuring errors. In extreme cases a nozzle can be used for
low concentrations of solid particles in the measuring medium. Even then the pressure
connections can create problems because they may become plugged. The metering
edge of a variable area flowmeter float is also precisely machined and must not be
damaged.
Bearing wear in totalizers with rotating meter bodies can be added to the difficulties
mentioned above. Even a very small quantity of solid particles in the measuring medi-
um may considerably damage these devices. Ideally, the measured medium should
feature a certain tendency to lubricate.
256
Materials
Material selection always requires information about corrosion problems. Some mea-
suring media are chemically harmless, but can become corrosive when small amounts
of other
materials are present, perhaps only contamination. Therefore care must be exercised.
The variety of possible materials is especially restricted where complicated and difficult
to manufacture parts are required. This is particularly true for volume totalizers and, to
a certain extent, for swirl, vortex and mass flowmeters.
At first glance, differential pressure measurement would seem to present no problems.

But not only the orifice plate or the nozzle must be manufactured of resistant materials.
It is also important that the pressure line, fittings and transmitters are made of a mate-
rial that is suitable for the measuring medium. Sometimes constant flushing of the pres-
sure lines is used to help.
The price issue comes up for variable area flowmeters made of stainless steel. They
are only installed if no supply power is available at the measuring point. The material
selection problem is solved almost ideally for electromagnetic flowmeters because the
PTFE liner material can be used for almost all measuring media. Platinum is exception-
ally good as an electrode material. It may also be possible to solve the electrode ma-
terial problem by using the capacitive electrode design.
The ultrasonic flowmeter requires the proper protective tube material for the sound
transducer (transmitter/receiver).
Cleaning, Sterilization
Why must a closed piping be cleaned? There are various answers: deposits due to sed-
imentation or adhesion reduce the cross sections, crystal formations block the flow,
residue can contaminate the product. The ability to clean is a determining factor for
flowmeter selection.
Where deposits are to be expected meters with moving parts are seldom installed. Dif-
ficulties can also be encountered in installations of swirl, Vortex and thermal mass flow-
meters. In the ultrasonic flowmeters the sound path is altered so that erroneous mea-
surements may occur. In the Coriolis mass flowmeters deposits may cause a zero
shift. Nonconducting deposits affect the electromagnetic flowmeters unless the same
meter type with capacitive electrodes is installed. Electrically conductive deposits short
out the measuring signal and cause erroneous measurements.
257
Deposits are removed by flushing, dissolving, or by mechanical cleaning using a brush
or scraper. An unobstructed cross-section is a big advantage for this method. Using a
scraper even requires a piping with a defined diameter without internal steps. This re-
quirement can only be met by the electromagnetic flowmeter, and perhaps by the ultra-
sonic flowmeter. Residues remaining in the piping are a special problem in the food and
beverages industries, where bacteria may contaminate the final product. Thorough
cleaning and sterilization using steam, liquid cleaning agents, acids and bases are
mandatory. This is usually accomplished using CIP (Cleaning In Place) and SIP (Ster-
ilisation in Place) procedures, in which all elements in the system remain in place. The
CIP capability is determined by testing and confirmed by certificates. The oscillating
piston meter must be disassembled for cleaning.
4.1.5 Installation and Maintenance

The user of measurement information expects a problem free installation of the meter
and thereafter only wants to see accurate measurement values, the meter itself is no
longer of interest. Even though modern technology comes close to fulfilling these ex-
pectations, regular monitoring can prevent failures. Therefore included in the selection
of a meter is the question regarding the capabilities of the maintenance personnel.
The flowmeter, e.g. a Vortex or thermal mass flowmeter, is installed in the piping in a
relatively straightforward manner using flanged or threaded connections while giving
consideration to the inlet and outlet sections. At this point the requirement for stress
free installation must be emphasized because very often the meters are installed in
existing pipings, and existing stress is transferred to the meters. Wafer-type design
requires exact centering. And there are ultrasonic flowmeters the measuring elements
(transmitter/receiver) of which are welded into the piping wall. This method produces
error free measurements only when an on-site calibration is conducted which takes into
account the actual piping geometry.
The work is essentially completed when totalizers and variable area flowmeters which
operate without an external power supply are installed . Flowmeter sensors and sepa-
rate transmitters communicate with each other with low-level signals that are sensititve
to interference. For this reason special shielded cables are used. Flowmeters with in-
tegral mount design do not require this effort.
258
An appreciable expense is required for differential pressure flowmeter installations. In
this case, the pressure lines and various fittings must be installed and connected. Also,
differential pressure transmitters require an external power supply.
All measuring devices are designed such that maintenance personnel can monitor their
proper functional operation using a simple tests. The majority of these devices are self-
monitoring and report errors.
The wear in bearings and measuring elements of rotating totalizers can usually be best
determined by a visual examination. That is why these totalizers are designed such that
they can be opened on site.
When installing electromagnetic flowmeters, it must be ensured that they are axissym-
metrically fitted, that they are filled with the medium to be measured and that they are
not operated when empty. An exception is the FXP4000 flowmeter. This electromag-
netic flowmeter is suitable for use in partially filled pipings. If it cannot be avoided that
a system is sometimes run empty, the signal outputs are switched off accordingly, ei-
ther via an external contact, for pipe sizes greater than DN 10 and cable lengths of up
to 50 m (remote mount design), or automatically by means of an empty pipe detector
function. This avoids measuring errors in the measuring section when the pipe is emp-
ty.
For the majority of installations it is fully sufficient to realize a straight inlet section of
3 x D of the nominal diameter and an outlet section of 2 x D of the nominal diameter of
the flowmeter sensor. These are the manufacturers' specifications. According to the
reference conditions stipulated in EN 29104, for systems to be approved by the
Weights and Measures Office, and to comply with the DVGW Directives other straight
section lengths are specified and must be observed.
Valves or other shut-off elements should be installed in the outlet section. A slight slope
of approx. 3 % is advantageous for degassing. It should be ensured that the imaginary
line which connects the two electrodes is horizontal if possible or no more than 45 from
the horizontal, so that any air or gas bubbles cannot affect the measurement voltage.
259
The monitoring and test system for the electromagnetic meters is optimally structured.
In addition to internal test functions, simulators are available with which practically all
parameters can be checked.
Tasks Piping Mainte- Self- Service

On Site Upstream nance Monitoring
of Meter During
Operation
Oval Gear Flanged Filter Mainte- Not
Totalizer connection nance-free possible
Direct Volume Totalizers
Oscillating Piston Flanged Filter Mainte- Not Local

Totalizer connection, recommended, nance-free possible disas-
threads no steadying sembly
section possible
Lobed Impeller Flanged Filter Lubrication Not

Totalizer connection monitoring possible
Rotary Vane Flanged No Mainte- Not

Totalizer connection, steadying nance-free possible
Exchange
threads section
of measur-
ing inset
Woltman Flanged No Mainte- Not possible
Totalizer connection steadying nance-free possible
section
Indirect Volume Totalizers
Turbine Flanged No Mainte- Not Sensor

Flowmeter connection, steadying nance-free, possible replace-
electrical section monitoring ment
installation of possible
external lu-
brication
Vortex Flanged con- Long Mainte- Permanent Electronic
Flowmeter nection or steadying nance-free plausibility control
wafer-type section checking function
design, and error and test
electrical monitoring/ values,
installation reporting sensor is
exchange-
Swirl Flanged Short Mainte- able
Flowmeter connection, steadying nance-free
electrical section
installation
Tab. 4-9: Maintenance Requirements
260
Tasks Piping Mainte- Self- Service
On Site Upstream nance Monitoring
of Meter During
Operation
Differential Center meter Long inlet and Regular Not Direct
Pressure in flange, pres- outlet sections inspection possible measure-
Measurement sure line, fit- required ment
tings, transmit- at
ter, power transmitter
supply
Variable Area Flanged No regulations Mainte- Glass flow-

Flowmeter or nance-free meter
threaded Permanent with
connection plausibility SNAP-
checking, IN design
error moni-
Electromagnetic Flanged Short inlet and Mainte- toring and El. control
Flowmeter connection, outlet sections nance-free reporting function
electrical and test
Flowmeter
installation values,
simulators
Ultrasonic Flanged Long inlet and Mainte- Signalling

Flowmeter connection, outlet sections nance-free few failures
or weld-in
socket, el.
installation
Coriolis Mass Flanged No regulations Mainte- Permanent Electronic

Flowmeter connection, nance-free plausibility control
wall-mount- checking, functions
ing, electrical error moni- and test
installation toring and values
reporting
Thermal Mass Flanged, Inlet/outlet Mainte- Error Measuring

Flowmeter wafer-type sections nance-free reporting sensor
mounting and can be
plug-in exchanged
sensors
Tab. 4-10: Maintenance Efforts, Continued
261
4.2 Flowmeters for Channels and Free Surface Pipings
The comparison (Tab. 4-11) is not as extensive as those for meters in closed pipings.
A large number of parameters exclusively refer to closed pipings, and the application
range of the devices considered here is considerably restricted. As channels and free
surface pipings are mainly used for water or waste water applications, only these mea-
suring media will be considered here.
Waste water often includes a variety of nonwater components which must be taken into
account when making comparisons. Chemically aggressive components play an im-
portant role in material selection. Solid components can cause errors or hamper mea-
surements. Therefore, it is important that the sweeping forces of the water are sufficient
to carry the solids.
Meter Max. Meas. Error Meas. Value Indi- Solids in Air in Flow Re-
Sizes Flow Span Limit cation and Trans- Measuring Water gime Effects
Rate mission Medium
Weir Practically Unlim- 1:20 >3% With appropriate Risk of de- Ventila- None
umlimited ited (1:100) sensor selection all posit build- tion re-
Open types are possible, up up- quired so
Channel from local indicator stream of that the
to HART communi- weir and on stream
cation overflow separates
edge at the me-
tering
edge
Venturi Width 13,990 1:10 (Design No sedi- Degas- Inlet section
Flume in mm m3/h to type cali- mentation if sing in of 20 x B
220...3514 1:20 bration) minimum inflow straight,
6 % velocity is smooth, rect-
of rate maintained angular
EMF in All DN up to 267,000 1:50 0.25 % Electromagnetic Risk of sedi- Avoid air, 3 x D
Culvert DN 2500 m3/h of rate flowmeters offer all mentation at otherwise Inlet section
Free possibilities, from low flow ve- measur-
Surface local indicator to in- locity and ing errors
Piping terface and HART with heavy
communication solid parti-
+ PROFIBUS cles
+ FF
FXP4000 DN 150 to 171,000 1:100 TF: No sedi- Degas- Inlet section:
DN 2000 m3/h 5/3 % of mentation sing in 5 x DN
rate inlet Outlet sec-
VF: tion:
1 % of 3 x DN
rate
Tab. 4-11: Flowmeters for Channels and Free Surface Pipings
262
4.2.1 Solids in the Measuring Medium
When the flow velocity in the dammed area ahead of a weir decreases the solid parti-
cles carried along with the fluid will settle. The deposits change the geometric condi-
tions and cause measuring errors. Floating particles change the geometry even more
and may plug the meter overflow.
The Venturi flume accelerates the fluid in its constricted areas and drives the solids
through. The floating particles may have a negative impact on the level measurement.
Foam build up causes measurement errors which are a function of the type of sensor
used.
In pipe culverts extremely low velocities can be present, leading to the formation of de-
posits which, however, have little or no effect on the measurements. When the velocity
increases, the culvert is flushed (sand deposits in straight pipes are already carried
along at velocities > 0.25 m/s).
4.2.2 Gas Content

The gas content is usually due to entrained air. Since all the devices discussed in this
chapter measure the volume flow, the air content in the water is considered as fluid and
causes an error as large as the volume of the entrained air.
The weir requires ventilation through air entry at its sides so that the overflow stream
can separate from the metering edge and does not attach to the outer side of the weir
due to the presence of a vacuum. Air resulting from this ventilation causes no errors
because the level measurement is made approx. 4 x h upstream of the weir. Basically
open channel measurements are rarely affected by entrained air.
The FXP4000 also allows the measuring medium to deaerate within the inlet section.
It is, however, possible that in fully filled pipings air remains in the water and cannot
escape before reaching the measuring section. This may result in measuring errors.
In culverts air can be sucked in due to vortices in the inlet. This effect can be avoided
by increasing the air level upstream of the culvert (inlet shaft). When the incoming fluid
falls into the inlet shaft as a free stream the same air injection effects occur.
263
4.2.3 Flow Regime Effects
The flow regime effects in closed pipings have already been discussed in Chapter
4.1.2. What is said there also applies in this situation, especially for electromagnetic
flowmeters in culverts. An additional parameter complicates the measurements in open
channels and that is the nature of the upper surface of the liquid because wave motion
as the sensor seat will be included in the measurements. The weir is not as affected as
the Venturi flume.
The Venturi flume dams the flow in the water inlet section and thereby quiets the sur-
face when subcritical flow is present. The inlet section should be straight with a con-
stant cross sectional area without any unevenness.. The location of any hydraulic jump
should be at least 20 x w (flume width) upstream of the Venturi flume. On the outlet side
there is a requirement that in no case may backflow be present in the Venturi flume
which could produce a level at the measuring point that corresponds to a higher flow
rate. The Parshall flume allows for a slight backflow.
This backflow can be ideally handled in the FXP4000 electromagnetic flowmeter for
partially full pipings because this meter measures the combined dynamic effects of ve-
locity and the utilized cross sectional area. This means that at zero flow no metering
signal exists. The FXP4000 can measure flow in both directions. This means, it can
also measure the backflow.
The velocity distribution within the flow cross sectional area in the FXP4000 should be
approximately uniform. Therefore subcritical flow is preferred so that the irregularities
that might exist in the vicinity of a hydraulic jump can be avoided. Below are shown
some practical piping installations:
>10xD
>5xD
Fig. 4-1: Pipe Inlet
264
When the flow into the pipe occurs at a blunt entry as shown in Fig. 4-1, evidences of
separation at the wall near the inlet appear, oupled with vortex formation. Dependent
on the pipe roughness, inlet sections 15 x D (pipeline size) or longer are required so
that the flow is uniform in the measuring section. A more effective flow stream entry with
a trumpet shape can be used to reduce the length of the inlet section.
5xD 3xD
5xD 3xD
Fig. 4-2: Transition from Rectangular to Circular Cross Section
The FXP4000 reduces construction expenditures and can therefore be installed in

many locations. The transition to a circular cross section is very important because
waves and vortices can occur at these locations. An example of a transition from a rect-
angular to a circular cross section is shown in Fig. 4-2. Smooth transitions are preferred
with an important consideration that the bottom elevation extends right through the
FXP4000. The transitions already begin in the basin bottom with a channel.
A constant bottom elevation should also be maintained for installation in rounded chan-
nels whenever possible. The more the channel approaches an egg shape the more
readily can a FXP4000 be fitted (Fig. 4-3). An effective flow stream transition should
also be provided in these situations.
Fig. 4-3: Transition to a Round Cross Section
265
It is important to consider the conduit conditions far upstream of the measuring point.
A perpendicular inflow from the side generates vortices which will persist even after a
15 x D long straight section (Fig. 4-4). An overflow weir in the entry assures a satisfac-
tory flow stream.
Fig. 4-4: Partially Full Channel with Perpendicular Side Inflow (Top View)
Supercritical inflow must be transformed to subcritical.
The hydraulic jump moves in position as

a function of the energy content of the
inflow.
The insecure flow condition requires a
very long inlet section up to the measur-
ing point.
Local elimination of the hydraulic jump

trough installation of a stilling basin
which converts the kinetic energy to
thermal energy.
Installation of a transition shaft. There is

a risk that air is entrained when the out-
flow section is fully filled. Therefore, air
elimination must be provided.
Fig. 4-5: Supercritical Inflow
266
Fig. 4-6: Flat Gate in Outlet Section
The gate in the piping (Fig. 4-6) generates unsteady flow stream conditions. The hy-
draulic influences upstream however are small. Therefore the measuring point should
be situated 1 to 3 x D ahead of the gate.
The upstream effects of disturbances downstream of the FXP4000 are relatively small
so that generally a short outlet section is sufficient. An example is the free fall exit
(Fig. 4-7).
Fig. 4-7: Free Fall Downstream of the Measuring Point
The measuring point must far enough away so that the water surface level drop off
curve does not begin inside the meter. Usually, a distance of 3 x D is sufficient.
Occasionally, a measurement must be made after a channel bend which may include
a sloped bottom (Fig. 4-8). The centrifugal forces produce a sloped surface with a
perpendicular secondary flow. The local conditions determine possible measurement
errors.
Fig. 4-8: Cross Section Through a Channel Bend
267
5 Overview of the Outstanding Meter Features
5.1 Oval Gear Meters, Oscillating Piston Meters
Advantages:
High measuring accuracy
Suitable for measuring media with high viscosity
Operates in both flow directions (forward and reverse)
No flow profile effects, thus no inlet and outlet sections required
No external power supply
Approved by the Board of Weights and Measures
Limitations:
Volume totalizer
For liquids only
High pressure drop
Moving parts, wear
Accuracy decrease for lower viscosities due to gap losses
Sensitive to contamination, filter required
Flow blockage at zero flow through solid impurities
Sensitive to overloading
Monitoring and maintenance
5.2 Lobed Impeller Meters
Advantages:
Excellent measuring accuracy for gas measurements
No inlet and outlet sections required
No external power supply
Limitations:
Volume totalizer
For gases only
Moving parts, wear
Flow blockage at zero flow through solid impurities
Sluggish toward quick changes
Also affected by quick changes at high differential pressure, danger of
over speeding
Monitoring
269
5.3 Turbine Meters
Advantages:
No external power supply for Rotating vane and Woltman meters
Rotating vane and Woltman meters approved for water by the Board of Weights
and Measures
Turbine flowmeters suitable for cryogenic liquids
Turbine flowmeters usable at extreme temperatures and pressures
Turbine flowmeters approved for gas by the Board of Weights and Measures
Limitations:
Limited choice of materials
Only for low viscosities
Moving parts, wear
Sensitive to contamination
Axial flow totalizers are flow profile sensitive
Inlet and outlet sections required (not for rotating vane meters)
Affected by overloading and quick changes at high differential pressure, danger
of over speeding
Vibration sensitive
5.4 Vortex Flowmeters
Advantages:
No moving parts
Rugged construction
Suitable for liquids, gases and steam
Easily sterilized
Unaffected by pressure, temperature and density changes
Linear relationship between flow rate and measured value
Limitations:
Inlet and outlet sections required
Minimum Reynolds number required
270
5.5 Swirl Flowmeters
Advantages:
No moving parts
Short inlet and outlet sections 3 x D/1 x D
Excellent repeatability
Unaffected by pressure, temperature and density changes
Limitations:
Pressure drop
Minimum Reynolds number required
5.6 Differential Pressure Flowmeters
Advantages:
Universally suitable for liquids, gases and steam
Also usable in extreme situations, e.g. viscosity, due to variety of versions
Calculations possible for unusual situations
Suitable for extreme temperatures and pressures
Range changes possible
Low pressure drop for nozzles
Limitations:
Square root relationship between flow rate and differential pressure, therefore
smaller span
Affected by pressure and density changes
Pressure drop for orifice plates
Edge sharpness for orifice plates must be assured, therefore no solids or
contamination
Very long inlet and outlet sections
Expensive installation requiring differential pressure lines, fittings and sensors
Installation and maintenance experience advantageous
High maintenance requirements
271
5.7 Variable Area Flowmeters
Advantages:
Inexpensive
No external power supply required for local indication
Simple meter design, therefore easy to install and maintain
Indication also with opaque liquids
Metal cone meter with transmitter
Metal cone meter can be sterilized, CIP tested
Limitations:
Vertical mounting position
Constant pressure drop
Affected by density, temperature and viscosity changes
Solids damage metering edge, otherwise slight contamination allowed
Affected by pulsation and vibration
Expensive when exotic materials are required
5.8 Electromagnetic Flowmeters
Advantages:
Unobstructed flow passage without projecting parts
No moving parts
No additional pressure drop
Essentially flow profile insensitive, only short inlet and outlet sections required
Unaffected by changes in temperature, density, viscosity, concentration and
electrical conductivity
Favorable choice of materials for chemically aggressive or abrasive measuring
media
Unaffected by contamination and deposits
Especially suitable for hydraulic solids transport
Can be sterilized, CIP tested
Linear relationship between flow rate and measured variable
Measuring range setting can be optimized
Low maintenance, but still easy to maintain
Limitations:
For liquids only
Lower conductivity limit 0.05 S/cm
Gas inclusions cause errors
272
5.9 Ultrasonic Flowmeters
Advantages:
Unobstructed flow passage
No moving parts
Favorable choice of materials for chemically aggressive liquids
Linear relationship between flow rate and measured variable
Low maintenance
Transit time meters unaffected by temperature, density and concentration
Later installation in existing pipe possible with individual elements, but onsite
calibration required
Limitations:
Still problematic for liquid and gas measurements
Sound beam must traverse a representative cross section, therefore flow profile
dependent. Long inlet and outlet sections required
Errors due to deposits
Transit time meters require clean liquids
Doppler meters only for slight contamination or few gas bubbles
Doppler meters affected by sound velocity changes due to temperature, density
and concentration
Unsuitable for heavily contaminated liquids
Gas bubbles cause errors
273
5.10 Coriolis Mass Flowmeters
Advantages:
True mass flow measurement
Additional temperature and density measurements
Very high accuracy for mass flow measurements
Highly accurate density measurement
Unaffected by pressure, temperature and viscosity
Can be sterilized, CIP tested, EHEDG certified
Measuring range settings can be optimized for flow rate and density
Self-draining
Limitations:
Affected by gas inclusions
Vibration sensitive when improperly installed
Limited choice of materials
Nominal diameter limited at the top
5.11 Thermal Mass Flowmeters
Advantages:
Direct gas mass flow measurement
No pressure and temperature compensation required
Very low pressure drop
High measuring accuracy
Large span
No moving parts
Rugged construction
Short response time
Easily sterilized
Limitations:
For gases only
Inlet and outlet sections required
274
5.12 Weirs
Advantages:
Simple design
Minimum space requirements at the measuring point
Low construction costs
Limitations:
Damming, therefore higher space requirements upstream of the measuring point
Risk of deposit build up upstream of the weir, not suitable for waste water
Stream separation through ventilation must be assured
Affected by large floating items
5.13 Venturi Flumes
Advantages:
No potential energy differences compared to the weir
Low pressure drop
Suitable for unclean waste water
Easy to maintain
Limitations:
Nonlinear flow characteristic
Channel constriction resulting in damming of the headwater and risk of deposit
build up in the event of velocity decrease
Risk of plugging through larger floating items
Measurement impossible when backflow exists in tail water up to Venturi flume
Quality and reliability of the measurement depending on connected sensor
Installation costs
275
5.14 Electromagnetic Flowmeters in Culverts
Advantages:
All the advantages of the electromagnetic flowmeters listed in Item 5.8
Smaller nominal diameter as compared to FXP4000, lower price
Higher accuracy than FXP4000
Limitations:
Building required, cost intensive
Higher pressure drop as compared to FXP4000
Risk of deposit build up in the event of too low flow velocity
5.15 Electromagnetic Flowmeter FXP4000 for Partially Full

Pipelines
Advantages:
All the advantages of the electromagnetic flowmeters listed in Item 5.8
No culverts required
No onsite calibration required
Unobstructed passage, no cables or mechanical parts across the pipe cross
section
Direct installation in free surface pipes
Easy cleaning
Backwater is permissible
No risk of deposit build up, contrary to culverts
No constrictions through the measuring system, thus no backwater in free surface
pipes
Short inlet and outlet sections
Limitations:
Minimum nominal diameter: DN 150
276
6 Keywords for the Operating Conditions and
Requirements on the Measuring Point
When a measuring point is being planned, certain requirements must be satisfied in or-
der for the desired measuring effect to be realized. Shall the meter provide information
by itself (for example through local indication) or support another function (for example
as an actual value generator for a controller). The planner begins his preparations for
the meter selection by considering the operating conditions. He raises questions re-
garding the measuring medium, the local conditions and the measured value presen-
tation requirements. The following keyword summary is provided as a selection aid:
Properties of the Measuring Medium:

Gas, steam: dry, wet
Liquids: gas and solids content, crystallizing component deposits, dust in gas
Density
Temperature, temperature variations, time relationships
Viscosity
Electrical conductivity, of the deposits
Chemical aggressiveness, material selection
Abrasion danger
Operating Conditions:
Pipe nominal diameter
Design of a channel, slopes, damming
Pressure rating
Flow rate, smallest, largest value: type of flow changes (step changes)
Flow conditions: linear, turbulent flow
velocity distribution, swirl, pulsation
Bidirectional (forward and reverse)
Static pressure, pressure shock, pressure drop permissible
Ambient Conditions:
Ambient temperature
Humidity effects, degree of protection
Dust entry, degree of protection
Vibration
Pipeline construction upstream and downstream of the measuring point
Explosion protection
Power supply, cabling
Electromagnetic and radio frequency interference
Mounting options
277
Measured Value Presentation:
Measuring accuracy
Fixed, adjustable, internal, external measuring range
Internal, external monitoring capabilities
Local indication
Totalization, integration
Alarm signalling unit
Standardized analog output, what value?
Pulse output for remote totalization
Communication, which type?
- PROFIBUS, FOUNDATION Fieldbus
- HART Protocol
Explosion protection
Calibratability
278
7 Standards and Regulations
DIN 1319 Grundbegriffe der Messtechnik
Fundamentals of metrology
DIN ISO 6817 Durchflussmessung von leitfhigen Flssigkeiten

Measurement of conductive liquid flow in closed conduits
DIN ISO 9104 Durchflussmessung von Fluiden

Measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits
DIN 1952 Durchflussmessung mit Blenden, Dsen, Venturi-Rohren

Measurement of fluid flow by means of orifices, nozzles
and Venturi tubes
DIN 19559 Durchflussmessung von Abwasser in offenen Gerinnen

und Freispiegelleitungen
Measurement of flow of waste water in open channels and
gravity conduits
VDE/VDI 3512 Durchflussmessungen mit Drosselgerten,

Messanordnungen
Measurement of fluid flow with primary devices,
measurement setup
VDE/VDI 2040 Berechnungsgrundlagen fr die Durchflussmessung

mit Drosselgerten
Measurement of fluid flow with primary devices,
calculation bases
EN 60529 IP-Schutzarten
Specification for degrees of protection provided by
enclosures (IP code)
EN 29104 Verfahren zur Beurteilung des Betriebsverhaltens von

magnetisch-induktiven Durchflussmessgerten
Methods of evaluating the performance of electro-
magnetic flow-meters for liquids
DIN VDE 0170/017 Bestimmung fr explosionsgeschtzte elektrische

Betriebsmittel
Requirements for electrical apparatus for potentially
explosive atmospheres
DIN VDE 0165 Errichten elektrischer Anlagen in explosionsgefhrdeten

Bereichen
Explosive atmospheres - Electrical installations design,
selection and erection
279
DIN EN 50014 to 50020 Elektrische Betriebsmittel fr explosionsgefhrdete
and 50028 Bereiche
Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmosphere
NAMUR NE 21 NAMUR-Empfehlung
Elektro-magnetische Vertrglichkeit
NAMUR Recommendation
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
280
8 Materials, Corrosion Resistance Tables
Included among the criteria for meter selection are the materials to be utilized. Of pri-
mary interest are those materials which come in contact with the measuring medium.
Also the ambient conditions must not be neglected where it is most important that hu-
midity be considered.
Generally the user knows his measuring media so well that he can readily indicate suit-
able materials. The following tables are provided for assistance. The listed information
is taken from manufacturers' publications. However, a guarantee for the completeness
and correctness cannot be given.
The following list includes the available materials for the process-wetted parts in the in-
dividual measuring devices.
Vortex Flowmeters:
Meter tube: Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy C
Sensor: Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy C
Shedder: Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy C
Gasket: Graphite, PTFE, Viton A, Kalrez
Swirl Flowmeters:
Meter tube: Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy C
Sensor: Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy C
Shedder: Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy C
Gasket: Graphite, PTFE, Viton A, Kalrez
Electromagnetic Flowmeters:
Liner Hard rubber, soft rubber, PFA,
PTFE, Torlon, Peek,
PVDF, Ceramic Carbide
Electrodes Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy B,
Hastelloy C, stainless steel 1.4539,
Titanium, Tantalum, Platinum Iridium
Coriolis Mass Flowmeters:

Meter tube Stainless steel 1.4571, 1.4435,
Hastelloy C
281
Thermal Mass Flowmeters
Meter tube Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy
Sensor Stainless steel 1.4571, Hastelloy,
Ceramic Al2O3
Gasket Viton, Kalrez
Variable Area Flowmeters:

Meter tube Glass, Hastelloy C,
PTFE, stainless steel 1.4404
Float Glass, stainl. steel 1.4571, Hastelloy C,
PVDF, PTFE
Fittings Stainl. steel 1.4301, PVC, Hastelloy C
O-rings Buna N, Viton A, Ethylene/
Propylene = EPDM
The following symbols are used in the resistance tables:

+ indicates usable material
- indicates unsuitable material
open fields indicate unknown
resistance
Even though the tables may indicate that a metal is satisfactory, electromagnetic flow-
meters may nevertheless show malfunctions, due to electrochemical reactions in the
flowmeter.
Liability Note:
The following resistance table for ABB flowmeters has been compiled from reference
literature and own experience. It is intended to allow for a pre-selection of potentially
suited materials for a special application, or for excluding unsuitable materials a priori.
However, these specifications are only recommendations for which no liability can be
assumed since the corrosion behavior under actual operating conditions may deviate
from results obtained in the laboratory with clean measuring media. Reliable specifica-
tions require operational corrosion tests or must be based on the user's operational ex-
perience.
The specifications in the tables refer to laminar corrosion attack. The risk of local cor-
rosion attack (pitting corrosion, stress corrosion cracking) has not been taken into ac-
count.
282
Metals Non-Metals
Electrical Conductivity
Stainl. steel 1.4301

Concentration (%)
Temperature (C)
Gaseous/Liquid
Hard Rubber
Soft Rubber
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
Tantalum
Platinum
Titanium
Viton A
Buna N
EPDM
Glass
PVDF
AI2O3
PTFE
PVC
PFA
Acetic acid F - 100 40 + + + + + + + + + - - + + + - - - - + +
Acetic acid F + 50 80 + + + + + + + + + - - + + + + - + +
Acetic anhydride F + 100 20 + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Acetylene G - 100 20 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Alum. chloride solution F + 30 70 - - - - + - - + + + + + + + + +
Alum. chloride solution F + 80 70 - - - - + - - + + + + + + +
Alum. sulfate solution F + 20 50 - - - + - + + + + + + + + + +
Alum. sulfate solution F + 50 50 - - - + - + + + + - - + + + +
Ammonia G - 100 50 + + + + + + + - + - - + + + + - - - + +
Ammonia solution F + 25 50 + + + + + + + - + - - + + + + + + + +
Aniline F - 100 25 + + + + - + + + + - - + + - + +
Argon G - 100 100 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Beer F + 10 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Benzene F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - - - - + +
Blood F + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Brine F + 20 - - - - - + - + + + + + - + + + +
Bromine F - 100 20 - - - - - + - + + + + + - + +
Butane G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - - + +
Butyl acetate F 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + +
Butyl alcohol F - 100 20 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Butylene G - 100 20 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Calcium chloride solution F + 100 20 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Calcium hydroxide sol. F + 50 50 + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + +
Calcium hypochlor. sol. F + 20 50 - - - - - + + + + + + + + + +
Caprolactam F - 50 50 + + + + + - + +
Carbolic acid F - 90 50 - + + + + + + + + - - + + - - - + - + +
Carbon dioxide G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Carbon tetrachloride F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + - - + + + - + + - + +
Carbonic acid F + 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Carboxylic acid, diluted F - 50 + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Chlorinated water F + 100 20 - - - + + - - + + + + + - + +
Chlorine dioxide, dry G - 100 20 + + + + - - + + + + +
283
Metals Non-Metals

Concentration (%)
Temperature (C)
Gaseous/Liquid
Hard Rubber
Soft Rubber
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
Tantalum
Platinum
Titanium
Viton A
Buna N
EPDM
Glass
PVDF
PTFE
AI2O3
PVC
PFA
Chlorine, dry G - 100 20 + + + + - + + + - + + - + + + + +
Chlorine, dry F - 100 20 + + + + - + + + - - + + - + + - + +
Chlorine, wet G - 100 20 - + - - - + + - - + + - + + + + +
Citric acid F + 60 50 + + + - + + - + + + + + - + +
Copper chloride solution F + 50 20 - - - + - + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Copper sulfate solution F + 50 80 + + + + - + + + + + - + + + + + + - + +
Copper sulfate solution F + 100 80 + + + + - + + + + + - + + + + + + - + +
Deionized water F - + + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + +
Diesel fuel F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - + + - + +
Ethane G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - - + +
Ethanol F - 96 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - +
Ethyl acetate F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - - + - + +
Ethyl alcohol F - 100 78 + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Ethyl ether F - 100 20 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - + + - + +
Ethylene G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + +
Ethylene chloride F - 100 50 - + - + + + + + + - - + + - + - - + +
Ethylene glycol F + 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + - - + +
Fatty acid F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + +

Ferric chloride solution F + 3 20 - + - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Ferric chloride solution F + 10 20 - - - - - + + + + + - + + + + + + + + +
Ferric sulfate solution F + 10 20 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Fluorine G - 100 20 + + + + - + - + + - + + - -
Formaldehyde solution F + 40 50 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - + + + + +
Formic acid F + 100 80 - + - + - + - + + - - + + - + + - + +
Gasoline F - 100 20 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - + + - + +
Gelantine F + 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Glycerine F - 100 100 + + + + + + + + + - + + - + - - + +
Glycol F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + +
Heating oil F - 100 80 + + + + + + + - + + + +

Helium G - 100 80 + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Heptane F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + - - + + - - + + - + +
284
Metals Non-Metals

Concentration (%)
Temperature (C)
Gaseous/Liquid
Hard Rubber
Soft Rubber
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
Tantalum
Platinum
Titanium
Viton A
Buna N
EPDM
Glass
PVDF
PTFE
AI2O3
PVC
PFA
Hexane F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + - + + - + +
Hydrazine solution F + 25 20 + - + - + - - + + + - + + - -
Hydrobromic acid F + 48 50 - - - - + - - + + + + + + - + + + +
Hydrochloric acid F + 10 50 - - - - + - + + + + - + + - - + + + + +
Hydrochloric acid F + 37 20 - - - - + + - + + + - + + - - + + + + +
Hydrocyanic acid F + 100 20 + + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + +
Hydrofluoric acid F + 40 20 - - - - - + - - + + - + + - - - + + - -
Hydrofluoric acid F + 70 20 - - - - - + - - + - - + + - - - + - - -
Hydrogen G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Hydrogen chloride G - 100 20 - + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + +
Hydrogen peroxide sol. F + 40 20 + + + + + - + - - - + + + + + - +
Hydrogen sulfide, dry G - 100 20 + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Kerosine F - 100 20 + + + + + + +
Krypton G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - - + +
Magnesium chloride s. F + 50 20 - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Magnesium sulfate sol. F + 20 50 + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Malic acid F + 50 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Methane G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + - - + +
Methanol = Methyl alc. F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + +
Methylbenzene = Toluol F - 100 50 + + + + + + - - + + - - + + - + +
Methylene chloride G - 100 20 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - - - - - + +
Monochloroacetic acid F + 70 50 + + + + + + - - + + + - - - + +
Natural gas, dry G - 100 40 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - + + + + +

Neon G - 100 100 + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Nitric acid F + 20 40 + + + + - + + + + - - + + - - - + + + +
Nitric acid F + 70 50 - + + + - - + + + - - + + - - - + - + +
Nitrogen G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - - + +
Oleum F + 10 50 - - - - + - - - + - - + - - + - - + +
Oleum F + 20 20 - - - - + - - + + - - + - - + - - + +
Olive oil F - 50 + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + - + +
Oxalic acid solution F + 10 50 - + - + + + - + + + - + + + + + - + +
285
Metals Non-Metals

Concentration (%)
Temperature (C)
Gaseous/Liquid
Hard Rubber
Soft Rubber
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
Tantalum
Platinum
Titanium
Viton A
Buna N
EPDM
Glass
PVDF
PTFE
AI2O3
PVC
PFA
Oxygen G - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + - - + +
Ozone G - 10 20 + + + + + + + + - - + + + - + + + +
Perchloroethylene F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - - + + - + +
Petroleum F - 100 20 + + + + + + + + - - + + - + + + + + +
Phenol F - 90 50 - + + + + + + + + - - + + - - - + - + +
Phosgene F - 100 20 + + + + + + + + + - - + + + - - + +
Phosphoric acid F + 30 50 - + - + + + - + + - - + + + - + + - + +
Phosphoric acid F + 80 20 - + - + + + - + + + + + + - - + + + + +
Photographic emulsion F + 20 + + + + + + + + + +
Phthalic anhydride F - 20 - - - - + + + + + + - + + - + + + + +
Potassium chloride sol. F + 30 20 - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Potassium hydroxide sol. F + 50 20 + + + + + + - - + + + + - + + + +
Potassium permang. sol. F + 50 20 + + + + + + + - - + + + + + - +
Potassium sulfate sol. F + 20 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Propane G - 100 50 + + + + + + - - + + - - + - - + +
Sea water F + 50 - + - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Sodium bicarbonate s. F + 20 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Sodium bisulfate solut. F + 10 50 - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Sodium bisulfate solut. F + 50 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Sodium carbonate sol. F + 50 50 - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Sodium chloride sol. F + 10 20 - + - - - + + + + - - + + + + + + + + +
Sodium chloride sol. F + 20 20 - - - - - + + + + - - + + + + + + + + +
Sodium hydroxide sol. F + 20 50 + + + + + + + - + - + + + - - + + - +
Sodium hydroxide sol. F + 50 50 + + + + + + - - + + + + - - - + + - -
Sodium hypochloride s. F + 20 50 - - - - + + - + - - + + + + + - + +
Sodium nitrate solution F + 30 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Sodium silicate solution F + 30 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Sodium sulfate solution F + 20 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Sodium vanadate sol. F + 10 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Spinning bath F + 50 + + - - + - - + + - + - + +
Sulfur dioxide, dry G - 100 50 + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Sulfuric acid F + 10 50 - + - - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + +
Sulfuric acid F + 50 20 - + - - + + - + + + + + + - + + - + +
286
Metals Non-Metals

Concentration (%)
Temperature (C)
Gaseous/Liquid
Hard Rubber
Soft Rubber
Hastelloy B
Hastelloy C
Tantalum
Platinum
Titanium
Viton A
Buna N
EPDM
Glass
PVDF
PTFE
AI2O3
PVC
PFA
Sulfuric acid F + 96 20 - + - + + + - + + - - + + - + + - + +
Sulfurous acid F + 10 20 + + - + - + + + - + + + + + +
Tannic acid F + 50 50 + + + + + + + - - + +
Tartaric acid F + 20 50 - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + +
Toluene F - 100 50 + + + + + + - - + + - - + + - + +
Trichlorethylene F - 100 50 + + + + + + + + + - - + + - - + + - + +
Tricresylphosphate F 100 50 + + + + + + - - + + + - - - + +
Urea F + 30 50 + + + + + + + + + + + + - + +
Vinyl acetate F 100 20 + + - + - - + + + + + + +

Vinyl chloride F 100 20 + + + + + + - - + + - + +
Wort F + 5 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Xylene F - 100 50 + + + + + + - - + + - - + - + +
Yeast F + 20 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
287
9 References
Eck, Bruno Technische Strmungslehre
[Technical Fluid Mechanics]
Springer-Verlag, Berlin
Hengstenberg, Sturm, Messen, Steuern, Regeln in der Chemischen Technik

Winkler [Measurements, Control, Regulation in Chemical Processes]
Springer-Verlag, Berlin
Kalide, Wolfgang Einfhrung in die technische Strmungslehre

[Introduction to Technical Fluid Mechanics]
Carl Hauser Verlag, Mnchen
Naudascher, Eduard Hydraulik der Gerinne und Gerinnebauwerke

[Open Channel and Channel Structure Hydraulics]
Springer-Verlag, Wien, New York
Company Technical Literature:

ABB Automation Products
Aerzener Maschinenbaufabrik
Bopp und Reuther
Danfoss
Meinecke
Siemens
Dechema-Werkstofftabelle: Dechema Frankfurt/Main

[Materials table]
289
D184B075U02 Rev. 08 09.2011
The features and characteristics of the most important methods of
measuring the flowrate and quantities of flowing fluids are described
and compared.
Numerous practical details provide the user with valuable information

about flow metering in industrial applications.

Basics and practice

Industrial Flow Measurement - Basics and Practice PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Industrial Flow Measurement - Basics and Practice PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D184B075U02 Rev. 08 09.2011

Numerous practical details provide the user with valuable information

Industrial flow measurement

2011 ABB Automation Products GmbH

ABB Automation Products GmbH

This publication for industrial flow measurement aims at supporting practitioners in

Advanced developments and a well-structured, global network of ABB research cen-

ABB Power and productivity for a better world

A Area, cross-section (mm2, m2 )

1 Introduction to the Physics of Flow Rate and Total Flow Measurements 13

2 Flow Rate and Total Flow Measurement of Gases and Liquids . . . . . . . 29

3 Regulations and Requirements Regarding Quality, Environment,

4 Device Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

5 Overview of the Outstanding Meter Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

6 Keywords for the Operating Conditions and Requirements

7 Standards and Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

8 Materials, Corrosion Resistance Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

The most important basic values are mass and volume:

As a ratio of mass to volume the density defines the relationship between

[K ] : thermal volume expansion coefficient

T[K]: (specific fluid property) temperature

The normal volume Vn is:

1.2.2 Reynolds Number

Fig. 1-1: Laminar Flow Velocity Profile

If the velocity increases or the viscosity decreases an additional motion is superim-

Fig. 1-2: Turbulent Flow Velocity Profile

1.2.4 Flow Separation

Fig. 1-3: Dead Zone with Vortex Formation

Fig. 1-6: Flow Separations and Flow Profiles in a Curved Pipe

Fig. 1-7: Flow Separation and Flow Profiles at a Step Expansion

Fig. 1-8: Karman Vortex Street

1.2.5 Energy Equations and Flow Rate

(Other energy types, e. g. electrical or chemical energy, are of no importance in this

Or, when comparing two reference points (Fig. 1-9):

Fig. 1-9: Piping Expansion

Fig. 1-10: Piping Restriction

which when inserted in Equation (1.10):

Fig. 1-11: Flow Obstruction

1.2.6 Channel Hydraulics

Flow in Open Channels

Fig. 1-12: Sloped Open Channel

Substituting v = g h a noteworthy limiting velocity vlim is reached, the wave propaga-

Flow v2 Discharge Froude Velocity Kinetic Energy

Tab. 1-2: Flow Regime and Slopes

Fig. 1-13 shows two examples:

The slope becomes steeper, the kinetic

Damming upstream of a gate, the potential

Fig. 1-13: Accelerating Transition

Transition from Supercritical to Subcritical

A similar effect occurs when a

A special case is the backflow

Fig. 1-14: Hydraulic Jump

Discharge form Large Openings or Rectangular Weirs

Fig. 1-15: Rectangular Weir

Through the area Ax = b dx the flow qvx = Ax vx comes out:

The following is valid for the entire opening:

Flowrate and Total Metering Instruments

Total Flow Meters Flowrate Flowrate

Oval Gear Turbine Differential Rectangular Venturi Electro-

2.1 Volume Totalizers

2.1.1 Oval Gear Totalizers

Fig. 2-1: Method of Operation of an Oval Gear Totalizer